6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

GRD130 - xxxD

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2010 All Rights Reserved.

( Ver. 1.1 )

⎯ 1 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Safety Precautions Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRD130. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbols used Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor injury or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

⎯ 2 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is dangerous.

• Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

• Fiber optic

Do not view directly with optical instruments.

CAUTION

• Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION

• Operating environment

The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

• Ratings

Before applying AC voltage or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.

• Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

• External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

• Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

• DC power

If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.

• Modification

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

DANGER

⎯ 3 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Short-link

Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to reduce.

• Disposal

This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

• Plastics material This product contains the following plastics material.

- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins

⎯ 4 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Contents Safety Precautions 1

1. Introduction 8

2. Application Notes 10 2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 10

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 10 2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 14 2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 18 2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 21

2.2 Frequency Protection 24 2.2.1 Frequency element 24 2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 26 2.2.3 Trip Circuit 27

2.3 Synchronism Check function 28 Setting 33

2.4 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 34

3. Technical Description 36 3.1 Hardware Description 36

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 36 3.2 Input and Output Signals 40

3.2.1 AC Input Signals 40 3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 40 3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 41 3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 43

3.3 Automatic Supervision 44 3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 44 3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 44 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 45 3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 45 3.3.4 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring 46 3.3.5 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring 46 3.3.6 Failure Alarms 46 3.3.7 Trip Blocking 47 3.3.9 Setting 48

3.4 Recording Function 49 3.4.1 Fault Recording 49 3.4.2 Event Recording 50 3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 50

3.5 Metering Function 52

4. User Interface 53 4.1 Outline of User Interface 53

⎯ 5 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.1.1 Front Panel 53 4.1.2 Communication Ports 55

4.2 Operation of the User Interface 56 4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 56 4.2.2 Relay Menu 59 4.2.3 Displaying Records 62 4.2.4 Displaying the Status 66 4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 71 4.2.6 Changing the Settings 72 4.2.7 Testing 99

4.3 Personal Computer Interface 102 4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 102 4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 103 4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 103 4.7 Clock Function 104

5. Installation 105 5.1 Receipt of Relays 105 5.2 Relay Mounting 105 5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 105 5.4 Handling Precautions 105 5.5 External Connections 106

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 107 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 107 6.2 Cautions 108

6.2.1 Safety Precautions 108 6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 108

6.3 Preparations 109 6.4 Hardware Tests 110

6.4.1 User Interfaces 110 6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 110 6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 111 6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 112

6.5 Function Test 114 6.5.1 Measuring Element 114 6.5.2 Protection Scheme 120 6.5.3 Metering and Recording 120

6.6 Conjunctive Tests 121 6.6.1 On Load Test 121 6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test 121

6.7 Maintenance 123 6.7.1 Regular Testing 123 6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 123 6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 124 6.7.4 Resumption of Service 125

⎯ 6 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.7.5 Storage 125

7. Putting Relay into Service 126

⎯ 7 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix A Signal List 127

Appendix B Event Record Items 169

Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List 173

Appendix D Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 175

Appendix E Case Outline 187

Appendix F Typical External Connection 189

Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet 197

Appendix H Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 227

Appendix I Return Repair Form 231

Appendix J Technical Data 237

Appendix K Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 243

Appendix L IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 247

Appendix M IEC61850: MICS & PICS 259

Appendix N Ordering 293

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.1.1)

⎯ 8 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1. Introduction GRD130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution substations, generators, motors and transformers.

The GRD130 series has two models and provides the following protection schemes in both models.

• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics

• Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection

• Over- and under-frequency protection

• Frequency rate-of-change protection

The GRD130 series provides the following protection schemes depending on the models.

• Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection

• Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection

The GRD130 series provides the following functions for all models.

• Eight settings groups

• Configurable binary inputs and outputs

• Circuit breaker condition monitoring

• Trip circuit supervision

• Automatic self-supervision

• Synchronizm check function

• Menu-based HMI system

• Configurable LED indication

• Metering and recording functions

• Rear mounted serial communication interface RS485 or fibre optic port for RSM, IEC60870-5-103 communication

• Front mounted RS232 serial port for local PC communication

• Ethernet LAN port for IEC61850 communication

All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485, fibre optic port or Ethernet LAN port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 standards.

Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRD130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by each member.

⎯ 9 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRD130 -

210 410 [APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP [APPLVES] setting OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs OFF OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs OFF Ve Vs O/V IDMT O/V DT U/V IDMT U/V DT ZOV IDMT ∗ ∗ ZOV DT ∗ ∗ NOV IDMT NOV DT FRQ DFRQ SYN Trip circuit supervision Self supervision CB state monitoring Trip counter alarm Multiple settings groups Metering Fault records Event records Disturbance records IEC60870-5-103 communication

IEC61850 communication 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage 1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage 2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage 3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage

3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0 Vs: reference voltage for synchronism check

IDMT: inverse definite minimum time DT: definite time

O/V: overvoltage protection U/V: undervoltage protection ZOV: zero phase sequence overvoltage NOV: negative phase sequence overvoltage FRQ: Frequency protection DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection SYN: synchronism check

( ∗): V0 calculated from three phase voltages

CAUTION: Do not change the APPL and APPLVES setting under service condition of the relay.

⎯ 10 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2. Application Notes 2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection

GRD130 provides four independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. OV3 and OV4 have definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

⎧ ⎫⎡ ⎤⎪ ⎪⎢ ⎥= × +⎨ ⎬⎢ ⎥⎪ ⎪−⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎩ ⎭

(1)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [OV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves

Curve Description k a c

“IDMT” 1 1 0

“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 by 0.001 step

0.00 – 5.00 by 0.01 step

0.000 – 5.000 by 0.001 step

V0

Pickup

Dropoff

⎯ 11 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The OV3 and OV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.

Overvoltage Inverse TimeCurves

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 1

TMS = 2

TMS = 5

TMS = 10

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV4.

The OV1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.

The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in

⎯ 12 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection OV3 and OV4. The OV3 and OV4 give trip and alarm signals OV3_TRIP and OV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3 and TOV4 respectively.

The OV1 to OV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV4EN] or the PLC signals OV1_BLOCK to OV4_BLOCK respectively.

1(∗) OV1 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV1_TRIP≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV1t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1(∗) OV1 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV1-C_TRIP

OV1-A_TRIP

OV1-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV1EN]

+ ≥1

51

52

53

101

102

103

104 39

40

41

1OV1_BLOCK 1584

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

1(∗) OV2 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV2_TRIP≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV2t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1(∗) OV2 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV2-C_TRIP

OV2-A_TRIP

OV2-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV2EN]

+ ≥1

54

55

56

108

109

110

111 45

46

47

1OV2_BLOCK 1585

Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection

OV3_TRIP≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV3t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& 1(∗) OV3 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV3-C_TRIP

OV3-A_TRIP

OV3-B_TRIP&

&

&

[OV3EN] +

57

58

59

115

116

117

118

1OV3_BLOCK 1586

Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection

⎯ 13 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

OV4_ALARM≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV4t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& 1(∗) OV4 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV4-C_ALARM

OV4-A_ALARM

OV4-B_ALARM&

&

&

[OV4EN] +

518

519

520

435

436

437

438

1OV4_BLOCK 1587

Figure 2.1.6 OV4 Overvoltage Protection

(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

Phase [APPL] setting

1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase 2 － － B - C phase B phase B - C phase 3 － － － C phase C - A phase

Setting The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV4 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV4 threshold setting.

TOV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV4 definite time setting.

OV4DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV4 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable

[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable

[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable

[OV4EN] Off / On Off OV4 Enable

⎯ 14 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

GRD130 provides four independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 and UV4 have definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

V 0

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

⎧ ⎫⎡ ⎤⎪ ⎪⎢ ⎥= × +⎨ ⎬⎢ ⎥⎪ ⎪−⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎩ ⎭

(2)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = undervoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [UV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

The UV3 and UV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

⎯ 15 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Undervoltage Inverse TimeCurves

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.12 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV4.

The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.

The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.

Figure 2.1.11 and Figure 2.1.12 show the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3 and UV4. The UV3 and UV4 give trip and alarm signals UV3_TRIP and UV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3 and TUV4 respectively.

The UV1 to UV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV4EN] or the PLC signals UV1_BLOCK to UV4_BLOCK respectively.

In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV4 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used) when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load shedding.

Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.

⎯ 16 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV1_TRIP≥ 1

1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV1t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

"ON"

[VBLKEN] +

"OFF"

[UVTST] +

UV1-C_TRIP

UV1-B_TRIP

UV1-A_TRIP1(∗) UV1 2(∗)

3(∗)

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV1EN]

+ ≥1

1(∗)

UVBLK 2(∗)

3(∗)

566

567

568

1(∗) UV1 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

157

158

159

60

61

62

&

UVBLK 97

1 UV1_BLOCK 1588

123

124

125

122

Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV2_TRIP

≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV2t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

UV2-C_TRIP

UV2-B_TRIP

UV2-A_TRIP1(∗) UV2 2(∗)

3(∗)

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV2EN]

+ ≥1

1(∗) UV2 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

177

178

179

63

64

65

1 UV2_BLOCK 1589

130

131

132

129

Figure 2.1.10 UV2 Undervoltage Protection

+ "ON"

[UV3EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV3t 0

t 0

t 0

1(∗)

UV3 2(∗)

3(∗)

UV3_TRIP ≥ 1

UV3-C_TRIP

UV3-A_TRIP

UV3-B_TRIP

NON BLK

1

&

&

&

66

67

68

137

138

139

136

UV3_BLOCK 1590

Figure 2.1.11 UV3 Undervoltage Protection

⎯ 17 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

+ "ON"

[UV4EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV4t 0

t 0

t 0

1(∗)

UV4 2(∗)

3(∗)

UV4_ALARM≥ 1

UV4-C_ALARM

UV4-A_ALARM

UV4-B_ALARM

NON BLK

1

&

&

&

528

529

530

444

445

446

443

UV4_BLOCK 1591

Figure 2.1.12 UV4 Undervoltage Protection

(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

Phase [APPL] setting

1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase 2 － － B - C phase B phase B - C phase 3 － － － C phase C - A phase

Setting The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.

UV4 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV4 threshold setting.

TUV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV4 definite time setting.

VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV1 Enable

[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable

[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV2 Enable

[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable

[UV4EN] Off / On Off UV4 Enable

⎯ 18 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZOV) is applied to earth fault detection on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.

The ZOV is available for the following models and their [APPLVES] settings:

Model 210 410

[APPLVES] setting － Off Ve Vs

ZOV (∗1) (∗2) (∗1) (∗2) Note: (∗1); V0 is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage.

(∗2); V0 is calculated from the three measured phase voltages.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZOV element susceptible to any 3rd harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.

For the earth fault detection, following two methods are in general use.

• Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by VT residual connection (broken-delta connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.

• Measuring the residual voltage across the earthing transformers as shown in Figure 2.2.14. A B C

GRD130 V0

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

GRD130

A B

V0

G

Resistor

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 are provided. These elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

⎯ 19 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

⎧ ⎫⎡ ⎤⎪ ⎪⎢ ⎥= × +⎨ ⎬⎢ ⎥⎪ ⎪−⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎩ ⎭

(3)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),

V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [ZOV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

ZOV OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZOV

⎯ 20 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 with independent thresholds output trip signals ZOV1 TRIP and ZOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1 and TZOV2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN] or PLC signals ZOV1 BLOCK and ZOV2 BLOCK.

ZOV1

ZOV1 TRIP≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZOV1t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZOV1EN]

+ ≥1

93

ZOV1 INST

197143

ZOV1_BLOCK 1592

Figure 2.1.16 ZOV1 Overvoltage Protection

ZOV2 ZOV2_ALARM≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZOV2t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZOV2EN]

+ ≥1

94

ZOV2 INST

198144

ZOV2_BLOCK 1593

Figure 2.1.17 ZOV2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks ZOV1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZOV1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping. TZOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=IDMT. TZOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZOV1 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=DT.

TZOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV1 definite time delayed reset. ZOV2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZOV2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming. TZOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=IDMT. TZOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZOV2 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV2EN]=DT. TZOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV2 definite time delayed reset. [APPLVES] Off / Ve / Vs Ve Ves(VT) setting [ZOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZOV1 Enable [ZOV2EN] Off / On Off ZOV2 Enable

⎯ 21 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect voltage unbalance conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.

The NOV protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.

The NOV protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if the phase sequence is reversed.

Two independent elements NOV1 and NOV2 are provided. The elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC 60255-127.

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

⎧ ⎫⎡ ⎤⎪ ⎪⎢ ⎥= × +⎨ ⎬⎢ ⎥⎪ ⎪−⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎩ ⎭

(4)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),

V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [NOV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

⎯ 22 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NOV OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NOV

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NOV1 element when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection. Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NOV1 and NOV2 with independent thresholds output trip signals NOV1 TRIP and NOV2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNOV1 and TNOV2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN] or PLC signals NOV1 BLOCK and NOV2 BLOCK.

NOV1 NOV1 TRIP≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNOV1t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NOV1EN]

+ ≥1

95

NOV1 INST

199 145

NOV1_BLOCK 1596

Figure 2.1.19 NOV1 Overvoltage Protection

⎯ 23 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NOV2

NOV2_ALARM≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNOV2t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NOV2EN]

+ ≥1

96

NOV2 INST

200146

NOV2_BLOCK 1597

Figure 2.1.20 NOV2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

The delay time setting TNOV1 and TNOV2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements NOV1 and NOV2. The minimum operating time of the NOV elements is around 200ms.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

NOV1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NOV1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=IDMT.

TNOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOV1 definite time setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=DT.

TNOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV1 definite time delayed reset.

NOV2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NOV2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=IDMT.

TNOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOV2 definite time setting. Required if [NOV2EN]=DT.

TNOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV2 definite time delayed reset.

[NOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NOV1 Enable

[NOV2EN] Off / On Off NOV2 Enable

⎯ 24 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRD130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency, overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.

Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load shedding.

Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage due to overfrequency conditions. Frequency rate of change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly when the frequency change is very rapid.

A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.2.1 Frequency element

Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting value.

Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting value.

These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5 ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive times.

The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.

Figure 2.2.1 shows characteristics of UF and OF elements.

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Element

Scheme Logic Figure 2.2.2 shows the scheme logic for the frequency protection in stage 1. The frequency element FRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The FRQ1 element is programmable for underfrequency or overfrequency operation by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN].

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [FRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal FRQ1 BLOCK.

The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) are the same logic of FRQ1

Hz

0 FVBLK setting

V

UF setting

OF setting

UF

OF

⎯ 25 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1

1

1

1

1 FRQBLK

≥1FRQ4_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ4 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ4

UF

&

≥1FRQ3_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ3 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ3

UF

&

≥1FRQ2_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ2 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ2

UF

&

≥1FRQ1_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ1 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ1

UF

&

"UF" [FRQ1EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ2EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ3EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ4EN] +

"OF" ≥1

218

219

220

221

356

357

358

359

222 NON FRQBLK

FRQ1_BLOCK 1600

FRQ2_BLOCK 1601

FRQ3_BLOCK 1602

FRQ4_BLOCK 1603 Figure 2.2.2 Scheme Logic for Frequency Protection

Setting The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks FRQ1 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ1 frequency element setting TFRQ1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ1 FRQ2 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ2 frequency element setting TFRQ2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ2 FRQ3 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ3 frequency element setting TFRQ3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ3 FRQ4 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ4 frequency element setting TFRQ4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ4 FRQBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting FRQ1EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ1 Enable FRQ2EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ2 Enable FRQ3EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ3 Enable FRQ4EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ4 Enable

⎯ 26 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). Each of the two frequency stages in GRD130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.3 and calculate the Δf/Δt

every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.

Both D and R elements output is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.

Hz Δf

Δt

sec

Figure 2.2.3 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Scheme Logic Figure 2.2.4 shows the scheme logic of frequency rate-of-change protection in stage 1. The frequency rate-of-change element DFRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The DFRQ1 element is programmable for frequency decay rate or frequency rise rate operation by the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN].

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [DFRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal DFRQ1 BLOCK.

The stage 2 (DFRQ2) to stage 4 (DFRQ4) are the same logic of DFRQ1.

Setting The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks DFRQ1 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s DFRQ1 element setting DFRQ2 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s DFRQ2 element setting DFRQ3 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s DFRQ3 element setting DFRQ4 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s DFRQ4 element setting FRQBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting DFRQ1EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ1 Enable DFRQ2EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ2 Enable DFRQ3EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ3 Enable DFRQ4EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ4 Enable

⎯ 27 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1

1

1

1

1 FRQBLK

≥1DFRQ4_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1DFRQ3_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1DFRQ2_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1DFRQ1_TRIP

1

&

&

&R

DFRQ1

D

&

"D" [DFRQ1EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ2EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ3EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ4EN]

+

"R" ≥1

225

226

227

228

360

361

362

363

222 NON FRQBLK

DFRQ1_BLOCK 1576

R DFRQ2

D

R DFRQ3

D

R DFRQ4

D

DFRQ2_BLOCK 1577

DFRQ3_BLOCK 1578

DFRQ4_BLOCK 1579

Figure 2.2.4 Scheme Logic of Frequency Rate-of-change Protection

2.2.3 Trip Circuit

The trip circuit of the frequency protection is configured with the combination of FRQ trip and DFRQ trip. The trip circuit is configured by the PLC function as shown in Figure 2.2.5.

FRQ1 TRIP DFRQ1 TRIP FRQ2 TRIP DFRQ2 TRIP FRQ3 TRIP DFRQ3 TRIP FRQ4 TRIP DFRQ4 TRIP

≥1 FRQ_TRIP 355

≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1

FRQ_S1_TRIP1680

FRQ_S2_TRIP1681

FRQ_S3_TRIP1682

FRQ_S4_TRIP1683

By PLC

2.2.5 Frequency Protection Trip circuit

⎯ 28 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.3 Synchronism Check function

GRD130 can offer an autoreclosing relay the voltage and synchronism check function.

There are four voltage modes in three-phase autoreclose mode, as shown below when all three phases of the circuit breaker are open. The voltage and synchronism check is applicable to voltage modes 1 to 3 and controls the energising process of the lines and busbars in the three-phase autoreclose mode.

Voltage Mode 1 2 3 4

Busbar voltage (VB) live live dead dead

Line voltage (VL) live dead live dead

The synchronism check is performed for voltage mode 1 while the voltage check is performed for voltage modes 2 and 3.

The mode 4 is used for manual closing.

&

SYN

UVL

OVL

OVB

& UVB

+"OFF"

[VCHK]

"S"

"DL"

"LD"

VCHK_DBLL

VCHK_LBDL

VCHK

TLBDL

0.01 - 10.00S

TDBLL

0.01 - 10.00S

&

&

0.01 – 10.00S

TSYN

≥1

& TDBDL

0.01 - 10.00S

5340t

"DD"

0t

0t

0t

536

533

535

532

414

415

416 VCHK_DBDL

VCHK_SYN413

412

&

Figure 2.3.6 Energising Control Scheme

Figure 2.3.6 shows the energising control scheme. The voltage and synchronism check output signal VCHK is generated when the following conditions have been established;

• Synchronism check element SYN operates and on-delay timer TSYN is picked up.

• Busbar overvoltage detector OVB and line undervoltage detector UVL operate, and on-delay timer TLBDL is picked up. (This detects live bus and dead line condition.)

• Busbar undervoltage detector UVB and line overvoltage detector OVL operate, and on-delay timer TDBLL is picked up. (This detects dead bus and live line condition.)

Using the scheme switch [VCHK], the energising direction can be selected.

⎯ 29 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Setting of [VCHK] Energising control

LD Reclosed under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check

DL Reclosed under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check

DD Reclosed under "dead bus and dead line" condition

S Reclosed with synchronism check only.

OFF Reclosed without voltage and synchronism check.

When [VCHK] is set to "LD", the line is energised in the direction from the busbar to line under "live bus and dead line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DL", the line is energised in the direction from the line to busbar under "dead bus and live line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DD", the line is under "dead bus and dead line" condition.

When a synchronism check output exists, autoreclose is executed regardless of the scheme switch position.

When [VCHK] is set to "S", a three-phase autoreclose is performed with the synchronism check only.

When [VCHK] is set to "OFF", three-phase autoreclose is performed without voltage and synchronism check.

The voltage and synchronism check requires a single-phase voltage from the busbar and the line.

Additionally, it is not necessary to fix the phase of the reference voltage.

To match the busbar voltage and line voltage for the voltage and synchronism check option mentioned above, the GRD130 has the following three switches and VT ratio settings as shown in Figure 2.3.7.

[VTPHSEL]: This switch is used to match the voltage phases. If the A-phase voltage or A-phase to B-phase voltage is used as a reference voltage, "A" is selected.

[VT-RATE]: This switch is used to match the magnitude and phase angle. "PH-G" is selected when the reference voltage is a single-phase voltage while "PH-PH" is selected when it is a phase-to-phase voltage.

[VES-RATE]: This switch is for reference voltage (Ves) and the setting method is same is above.

[3PH-VT]: "Bus"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Busbar voltage (VB). - The reference voltage (Ves) is Line voltage(VL).

"Line"; - The three phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are Line voltage (VL). - The reference voltage (Ves) is Busbar voltage(VB).

⎯ 30 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Three phase voltages

Reference voltage

[VTPHSEL]

"C"

"B"

"A"

+

+

+

Ves

Vc

Vb

Va

[VT - RATE]

"PH-G"

[3PH - VT]

"Line"

"Bus"

"PH-PH"

+

+

+

+

Voltage check &

Synchronism check

[VES - RATE]

"PH-G"

"PH-PH" +

+

Figure 2.3.7 Matching of Busbar Voltage and Line Voltage

Characteristics of OVL, UVL, OVB, UVB, and SYN The voltage check and synchronism check elements are used for autoreclose.

The output of the voltage check element is used to check whether the line voltage (VL) and busbar voltage (VB) are dead or live. The voltage check element has undervoltage detectors UVL and UVB, and overvoltage detectors OVL and OVB for the line voltage and busbar voltage check. The under voltage detector checks that the line or busbar is dead while the overvoltage detector checks that it is live. These detectors function in the same manner as other level detectors described later.

Figure 2.3.8 shows the voltage and synchronism check zone.

C D

B A

0V

UVL

OVL A, C, D: Voltage check B: Synchronism check

UVB OVB

VL Line voltage (Incoming voltage)

VB Busbar voltage (Runningvoltage)

Dead bus and dead line

Dead bus and live line

Live bus and live line

Live bus and dead line

Figure 2.3.8 Voltage and Synchronism Check Zone

The synchronism check element SYN is composed of the following check functions:

⎯ 31 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

- SYNΔθ(SYNθ): checks the phase angle difference between the line voltage (incoming voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

- SYNUV/OV: check the line voltage and the busbar voltage

- SYNΔV(SYNDV): checks the voltage difference between the line voltage (incoming voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

- SYNΔf(SYNDf): checks the frequency difference between the line voltage (incoming voltage) and the busbar voltage (running voltage)

The SYN is configured by these detectors as shown in Figure 2.3.9. The SYNΔf can be disabled by the scheme switch [DfEN].

SYNΔθ

SYNUV/OV

SYNΔV

SYNΔf

&& SYN

OUTPUT

"On"

[DfEN]"Off"+

Figure 2.3.9 Block diagram of SYN1

Figure 2.3.10 shows the characteristics of the synchronism check element used for the autoreclose if the line and busbar are live.

The synchronism check element operates if both the voltage difference and phase angle difference are within their setting values.

SYNUV

SYNOV

θθs VB

VL

ΔV

θS = SYNθ setting

Figure 2.3.10 Synchronism Check

For the element SYN, the voltage difference is checked by the following equations.

SYNOV ≤ VB ≤ SYNUV SYNOV ≤ VL ≤ SYNUV ΔV = |VL − VB| ≤ ΔVs

where,

ΔVs = Voltage difference setting VB = busbar voltage

⎯ 32 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

VL = line voltage SYNOV = lower voltage setting SYNUV = upper voltage setting ΔV = Voltage difference

The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.

Δf = |fVL1 − fVB| ≤ Δfs

where,

fVB = frequency of VB fVL = frequency of VL Δf = frequency difference Δfs= frequency difference setting

The phase difference is checked by the following equations.

VB ⋅ VL cos θ ≥ 0 VB ⋅ VL sin (SYNθS) ≥ VB ⋅ VL sinθ

where,

θ = phase difference between VB and VL SYNθs = phase difference setting

Note: The relay can directly detect a slip cycle (frequency difference Δf) if Δf is not used. When the phase difference setting SYNθs and the synchronism check time setting TSYN are given a detected maximum slip cycle is determined using the following equation:

where,

f = slip cycle SYNθs = phase difference setting (degree) TSYN = setting of synchronism check timer TSYN (second)

f = 180°×TSYN

SYNθs

⎯ 33 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Setting

The setting elements necessary for the voltage and synchronism check function and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks OVB 10 - 150 V 1 V 51 V Live bus check UVB 10 - 150 V 1 V 13 V Dead bus check OVL 10 - 150 V 1 V 51 V Live line check UVL 10 - 150 V 1 V 13 V Dead line check SYNUV 10 - 150 V 1 V 83 V UV element of synchronism check SYNOV 10 - 150 V 1 V 51 V OV element of synchronism check SYNDV 0 - 150 V 1 V 150 V Voltage difference for SYN SYN θ 5 - 75° 1° 30° Synchronism check (phase angle difference) SYNDf 0.01 – 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.00 Hz Frequency difference check for SYN TSYN 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Synchronism check time (Live-bus & Live-line) TLBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (Live-bus & Dead-line) TDBLL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (dead-bus & Live-line) TDBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time (Dead-bus & Dead-line) [VCHK] Off/LD/DL/DD/S Off Autoreclosing voltage check [DfEN] Off/On Off Frequency difference checking enable [VTPHSEL] A/B/C A VT phase selection [VT-RATE] PH-G / PH-PH PH-G VT rating [VES-RATE] PH-G / PH-PH PH-G Ves rating [3PH-VT] Bus / Line Line 3-phase VT location

⎯ 34 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

2.4 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRD130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip and alarm for each protection. Figures 2.4.1 shows gathered trip and alarm signals for each protection.

GRD130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.7. These auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection outputs by PLC function.

After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can be programmed by PLC function. The setting is respective for each output relay.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by monitoring the` status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker tripping coil current.

OV1 TRIP OV2 TRIP OV3 TRIP UV1 TRIP

UV2 TRIP UV3 TRIP ZOV1 TRIP NOV1 TRIP

GEN_TRIP ≥1 371

OV1-A TRIP OV2-A TRIP OV3-A TRIP UV1-A TRIP UV2-A TRIP UV3-A TRIP OV1-B TRIP OV2-B TRIP OV3-B TRIP UV1-B TRIP

UV2-B TRIP UV3-B TRIP

GEN_TRIP-A 372

≥1

GEN_TRIP-B 373≥1

2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

⎯ 35 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GEN. TRIP-N 375

374≥1

GEN_TRIP-C

OV1-C TRIP OV2-C TRIP OV3-C TRIP

UV1-C TRIP UV2-C TRIP UV3-C TRIP ZOV1_TRIP

FRQ1 TRIP DFRQ1 TRIP FRQ2 TRIP DFRQ2 TRIP FRQ3 TRIP DFRQ3 TRIP FRQ4 TRIP DFRQ4 TRIP

≥1FRQ_TRIP

355

≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1

FRQ_S1_TRIP1680

FRQ_S2_TRIP1681

FRQ_S3_TRIP1682

FRQ_S4_TRIP1683

By PLC

OV4 ALARM UV4 ALARM ZOV2 ALARM NOV2 ALARM OV4-A ALARM UV4-A ALARM OV4-B ALARM UV4-B ALARM OV4-C ALARM UV4-C ALARM ZOV2 ALARM

GEN_ALARM ≥1380

≥1 GEN_ALARM-A381

≥1 GEN_ALARM-B382

≥1 GEN_ALARM-C383

GEN_ALARM-N384

2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)

⎯ 36 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3. Technical Description 3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

The case outline of GRD130 is shown in Appendix E.

The hardware structure of GRD130 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.

The GRD130 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in a frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided with the front panel.

• Power module (POWD)

• Signal processing module (SPMD)

• Human machine interface module (HMI)

The hardware block diagram of GRD130 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.

IN SERVICE TR IP ALARM

VIEW

RESET

END

CELCAN

ENTER A B 0V

Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case

POWD

SPMD

Handle for relay withdrawal

HMI

⎯ 37 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Remote PC

Binary output(Trip command etc.)

RS485 or Optical fibre port × 1

Auxiliary relay × 8

Operation keys

RS232C I/F

Liquid crystal display 16 characters × 2 lines

Human machine Interface (HMI)

Photo-coupler × 8

Multi- plexer

Analogue filter

DC/DC Converter

A/D converter

LEDs

RAM

MPU

ROM

DC supply

SPMD2POWD

Local personal computer

AC input V

VT x 4 (Max)

Binary input

Monitoringjacks

Ethernet LAN I/F × 1 or 2 Remote PC

IRIG-B port External clock

ETH

Models 110D and 410D Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram

POWD Module The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay model.

This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary VTs, DC/DC converter and 8 photo-coupler circuits for binary input signals.

The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or 220/250V. The normal range of input voltage is shown in Appendix I.

SPMD Module (SPMD2) The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter, main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.

The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.

The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of 2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).

RS485, fibre optic and/or Ethernet LAN serial ports are provided for communication to a remote PC, and IRIG-B port also can be provided for external clock. Ethernet LAN ports are mounted on ETH sub-module.

Auxiliary relays for binary output signals are provided.

The SPMD module incorporates 8 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO7 and FAIL) for binary output

⎯ 38 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

signals. Auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6 are user configurable output signals and have one normally open and one normally closed contact. BO7 is also a user-configurable output signal and has one normally open contact. (Refer to Appendix F.) The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one normally closed contacts, and operates when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is detected.

Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module The operator can access the GRD130 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and setting data.

There are a total of 9 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.

(LED1) Yellow

(LED2) Yellow

(LED3) Yellow

(LED4) Yellow

(LED5) Yellow

(LED6) Yellow

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.

The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user, either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for ‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..

The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.

The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the settings or change the settings.

The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see Appendix B.)

⎯ 39 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel

IN SERVICETRIP

ALARM

VIEW

RESET

END

CELCAN ENTER

A B 0V

Liquid crystal display

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Operation keys

RS232C connector

Screw for cover

Screw for coverScrew for handleTo a local PC

Monitoring Jacks

Light emitting diodes (LED)

⎯ 40 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRD130 model and their respective input terminal numbers. Their terminal members depend on their scheme switch [APPLVES] setting.

Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPLVES] setting

Term. No. of TB1

Model

210 410

1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP

1-2 Phase-to-

phase voltage

Phase-to- neutral voltage

A-B phase voltage

A phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

3-4 Ve or Vs (*) Ve or Vs (*) B-C phase voltage

B phase voltage

B-C phase voltage

B-C phase voltage

5-6 --- --- --- C phase voltage

C-A phase voltage ---

7-8 --- --- --- --- Ve or Vs (*) Ve or Vs (*)

(*): Residual voltage Ve or Reference voltage Vs for synchronism check depend on the [APPLVES] setting.

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRD130 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.

The binary input circuit of the GRD130 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.

Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SNS - BI8SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm

BI1PUD - BI8PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

BI1DOD - BI8DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between eight settings groups. Change of active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2647).

Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD. These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.

⎯ 41 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

(−) (+)

GRD130

[BI2SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1

BI1DODBI1PUD

BI2DODBI2PUD

BI8DOD

0 t

BI8PUD

t 0

0 tt 0

0 tt 0

BI2

BI8

0V

1

[BI8SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1

BI2

BI8

[BI1SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"1

1

1

1284

1285

1291

768

769

775

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.

GRD130 provides 8 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail output and seven programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO7. BO1 to BO7 can be programmed.

The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BOs individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off “Inst”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Latch” by the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous for the input signal time.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit is detected.

⎯ 42 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Auxiliary relay

0.00 – 10.00s"Dl"

"Lat"S

RF/F

&

Signal List

6 GATES

or

6 GATES ≥1

&

Appendix B ≥1

0 t

+ &

≥Reset button

+

"Dw"[RESET]

&

TBO

IND.RESET1639 768 BI1_COMMAND

By PLC

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

Settings

The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:

Element Range Step Default Remarks [RESET] Inst Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,

delayed, dwell or latched. TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C

⎯ 43 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

GRD130 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logic on binary signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay elements or binary circuits.

Configurable binary inputs and the initiation trigger of fault records and disturbance records are programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.

PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to the PLC tool instruction manual.

Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool

⎯ 44 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. The GRD130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:

• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.

• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

• When a failure occurs, it is recorded as Alarm record, the user should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.

AC input imbalance monitoring The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of the AC input circuit is verified.

• Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= “3PN” setting

|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V)

• Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL-VT]= “3PN” setting

|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V)

where, a = Phase shifter of 120°, a2 = Phase shifter of 240°

The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits. These monitoring can be disabled by the scheme switches [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] respectively.

The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected with the incorrect phase sequence.

A/D accuracy checking An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Memory monitoring Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are performed to verify that memory circuits are healthy:

• Random access memory monitoring: Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.

• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.

• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in duplicate.

⎯ 45 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Watchdog Timer A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the software is running normally.

DC Supply Monitoring The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.1 shows a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1632:TC_FAIL signal by PLC. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip circuit. Then logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".

If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the BIn output is "0".

If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.

The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON".

1

[TCSPEN]

&

+ "ON"

≥1CB CLOSE

TCSV

0.4s

t 0

Trip circuit supervision(+)

1270TC_FAIL1632

BIn Trip output

CB trip coil

Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic

3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite states. Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD message and event record message respectively.

The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].

Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to “CB_N/O_CONT” and “CB_N/C_CONT” by PLC.

⎯ 46 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1

[CBSMEN]

&

+ "ON"

=1 CBSV

5.0s

t 0

CB_N/C_CONT 1634

CB_N/O_CONT 1633 1271

Figure 3.3.2 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit, the operation mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of fault current interruptions.

The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for maintenance of CB:

• Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.

The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-∗. The default setting is the TP_COUNT is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.

The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3.4 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring

If there is a failure in PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be prevented. Therefore, PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and the respective alarms "PLC stop" and "MAP stop" are issued if a failure is detected.

3.3.5 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring

The sending and receiving functions on the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending function is executed by checking a “Ping” response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an alarm of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.

These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].

3.3.6 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and alarms.

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The AC input imbalance monitoring alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switches

⎯ 47 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

[CTSVEN], [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and event recording of the failure may not function normally.

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item LCD Message LED "IN SERVICE"

LED "ALARM"

External alarm

Alarm record Message

AC input imbalance monitoring

Err:V0, Err:V2 (1) On/Off (2) On (4) V0 err, V2 err,

Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2) A/D accuracy check Err:A/D Off On (4) Relay fail Memory monitoring Err:SUM, Err:RAM,

Err:BRAM, Err:EEP Off On (4) Relay fail

Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ---- DC supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A CB condition monitoring

Trip count alarm ALM:TP COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM, Relay fail-A

PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data monitoring

Err: PLC, Err: MAP On On (4) Relay fail-A

GOOSE message check Err: GOOSE On On (4) Relay fail-A Ping response check Err: Ping On On (4) Relay fail-A

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2. (2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [V0SVEN] or [V2SVEN] is set to "ALM" and off when

set to "ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".

(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop. (4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

3.3.7 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.

• A/D accuracy check

• Memory monitoring

• Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switches [V0SVEN] and [V2SVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only an alarm is output.

⎯ 48 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.3.8 Setting

The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks [V0SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (Vo) [V2SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (V2) [TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision [CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision [TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm

TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting

⎯ 49 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.4 Recording Function

The GRD130 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recording

Disturbance recording

Counters

These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRD130 and the following items are recorded for one fault:

Date and time Trip mode Operating phase Power system quantities User configurable initiation

User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.

Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.

Date and time occurrence This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.

Trip mode This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.

Operating phase This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.

Power system quantities The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves)

- Frequency (f)

⎯ 50 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to 1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been stored, the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.

The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On” (only recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by setting. The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger events” is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On” mode.

The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set. The set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.

The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below. The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events

EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording is started when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates or a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by the PLC is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by PLC.

The records include maximum 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix C can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording

Model Model 210 Model 410

APPL setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PP

Analog signals

Vph Vph Vab Va Vab Vab

Ves Ves Vbc Vb Vbc Vbc

Vc Vca Ves

Ves Ves

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software instruction manual.

The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 5.0s.

The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in Table 3.4.2.

⎯ 51 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Recording time 0.1s 1.0s 2.0s 3.0s 3.5s 4.0s 4.5s 5.0s

50Hz 40 15 8 6 5 4 4 3

60Hz 40 13 7 5 4 4 3 3

Settings The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

Time 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 Post-fault recording time

OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection

UV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection

ZOV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NOV 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection

Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command

[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation

[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation

[ZOV] OFF/ON ON Start by ZOV operation

[NOV] OFF/ON ON Start by NOV operation

⎯ 52 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.5 Metering Function

The GRD130 measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages, residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages, and frequency. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

Current: The following quantities are measured and updated every second.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc) - Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca) - Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of

the system residual voltage, or of reference voltage for synchronism check (Ves) - Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0) - Frequency (f)

Demand

- Maximum and minimum of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc: max, min) - Maximum and minimum of zero sequence voltage (V0: max, min) - Maximum and minimum of the system residual voltage or the reference voltage for

synchronism check (Ves: max, min) - Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well. For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values are shown on the display screen.

The displayed quantities depend on [APPLVT] and [APPLVES] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1. Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for the measurement.

Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).

Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity Model 210 410APPL APPL APPL

Setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 3PN 3PP 2PPVaVbVcVphVesVabVbcVcaV1V2V0f

⎯ 53 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4. User Interface 4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring), IEC61850 communication or IEC60870-5-103 communication via Ethernet LAN port or RS485 port.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS-232C connector.

LCD

The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW and RESET will display the menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for 5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.

LED

There are 9 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu. TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued. ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected. (LED1) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates. (LED2) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates. (LED3) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates. (LED4) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates. (LED5) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates. (LED6) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.

LED1 to LED6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.

⎯ 54 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

, , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical values and text strings.

CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display.

ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".

Pressing RESET key turns off the display.

Monitoring jacks

The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.

RS232C connector

The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local personal computer.

⎯ 55 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:

• RS232C port • RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication • IRIG-B port

RS232C port This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting operation and display functions can be performed. (See Figure 3.1.3.)

RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port The RS485 port or the fibre optic port is connected to the IEC60870-5-103 communication via BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The RS485 port is a screw terminal and the fibre optic port is the ST connector.

Ethernet LAN port is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication networks using IEC 61850 protocol. This port can also be connected to the RSM. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

IRIG-B port The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.

This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

TB3

Rear view

E

TB2

RS485 connection terminal

(a) RS485 + 100BASE-TX

TB1 TB3

Rear view

E

TB1

TB2

OPT RT

Fibre Optic (ST)

(b) Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX

T1 R

F1

T

IRIG-B IRIG-B

Figure 4.1.1 Location of Communication Port

⎯ 56 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the LCD display and operation keys.

Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore, LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation

When the GRD130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication", "Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", …., "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.

Indication I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]

Metering 1 V a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 2 V b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 3 V c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 4 V p h ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 210. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 5 V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Not available for APPLVT=2PP in model 210. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 6 V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 7 V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 8 V c a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 9

⎯ 57 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 10 V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 11 V 0 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V Available for model 410. ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

Metering 12 f f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Indication

This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element, Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)

Displays in tripping

Latest fault P h a s e A B C E : Faulted phases. Not displayed for model 110 O C 1 : Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping

Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.

Notes: 1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of

tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.

2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.

3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the

RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other digest screens. LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.

⎯ 58 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation

Operation

LED lighting status

"TRIP" LED Configurable LED (LED1 – LED6)

Step 1

Press the RESET key more than 3s on the "Latest fault" screen

continue to lit

turn off

Step 2

Then, press the RESET key in short period on the "Latest fault" screen

turn off

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.

To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.

Auto-supervision E r r : R O M , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM" LED remains lit.

After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off automatically.

If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Notes: 1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an

alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.

2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key again to reset remained LED in the above manner.

3) LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.

While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To

⎯ 59 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.

Alarm Display

Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.

Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to ALM4.

4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRD130. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see Appendix E.

∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ : A L M 1

⎯ 60 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Record F. record

E. record D. record Counter

Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast

Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

Set. (change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

Test Switch Binary O/P

Menu

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

⎯ 61 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Record

In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count.

Status

The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP), clock adjustment and LCD contrast.

Set. (view)

The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Set. (change)

The "Set. (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Test

The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.

The "Test" menu also has password security protection.

When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top "MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.

M E N U • R e c o r d • S t a t u s • S e t . ( v i e w ) • S e t . ( c h a n g e ) • T e s t

To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to turn

off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the window, use the and keys.

/ 5 T r i p • S c h e m e s w • P r o t . e l e m e n t

⎯ 62 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix E, press the END key.

The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d • F . r e c o r d • E . r e c o r d • D . r e c o r d • C o u n t e r

• Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.

/ 2 F . r e c o r d • D i s p l a y • C l e a r

• Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 F . r e c o r d # 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1 1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1 # 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1 1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 1 0 1 # 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1 1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 2 9 9 # 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1 0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 4 1 2

• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

⎯ 63 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

/ 4 F . r e c o r d # 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 2

1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1 O V 1 Trip element P h a s e A B B C C A P r e f a u l t v a l u e s See Table 3.5.1 for the indicated quantities.

V a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 0 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z d f − ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z / s F a u l t v a l u e s V a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 0 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z d f − ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z / s

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

⎯ 64 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.

• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.

/ 2 E . r e c o r d • D i s p l a y • C l e a r

• Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 E . r e c o r d 1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9 O V 1 - A t r i p O n 1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9 O V 1 - A O n 1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9 R l y . c h a n g e

The time is displayed by pressing the key.

/ 3 E . r e c o r d 1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 2 5 5 O V 1 - A t r i p O n 1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 0 2 8 O V 1 - A t r i p O n 1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 7 7 3 R l y . c h a n g e

Press the key to return the screen with date.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear all the event records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.

⎯ 65 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the following sequence.

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.

/ 2 D . r e c o r d • D i s p l a y • C l e a r

• Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 D . r e c o r d # 1 1 6 / O c t / 2 0 0 9 1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 4 0 1 # 2 2 0 / S e p / 2 0 0 9 1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 3 8 8 # 3 0 4 / J u l / 2 0 0 9 1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 4 4 4 # 4 2 8 / F e b / 2 0 0 9 0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 8 7 6

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.

• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

⎯ 66 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

/ 2 C o u n t e r • D i s p l a y • C l e a r T r i p s • C l e a r T r i p s A (*) • C l e a r T r i p s B (*) • C l e a r T r i p s C (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r T r i p s ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ T r i p s A ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ (*) T r i p s B ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ (*) T r i p s C ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

To clear each count, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.4 Displaying the Status

From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronisation source

Status of clock adjustment

⎯ 67 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Status of LCD contrast

The data are updated every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

/ 1 S t a t u s • M e t e r i n g • B i n a r y I / O • R e l a y e l e m e n t • T i m e s y n c . • C l o c k a d j u s t . • L C D c o n t r a s t

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g • M e t e r i n g • D e m a n d

• Select "Current" to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.

<Model 210>

/ 3 M e t e r i n g V p h ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

<Model 410>

/ 3 M e t e r i n g V a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V

⎯ 68 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 0 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

• Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.

<Model 210>

/ 3 D e m a n d V p h m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V p h m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V e s m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V e s m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V a b m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V a b m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b c m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b c m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V f m a x ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z f m i n ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

<Model 410>

/ 3 D e m a n d V a m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V a m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V c m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V c m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V e s m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V e s m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V a b m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V a b m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b c m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V b c m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V c a m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V c a m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V 0 m a x ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V V 0 m i n ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V f m a x ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z f m i n ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

To clear all max data, do the following:

• Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r m a x ? E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.

⎯ 69 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

The display format is shown below.

[ ] Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 FAIL

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. For the binary input signal, see Appendix H. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit.

Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO7 are configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".

To display all the lines, press the and keys.

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.

/ 2 R y e l e m e n t O V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] O V # 2 [ 0 0 0 ] U V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] U V # 2 [ 0 0 0 ] Z O V [ 0 0 ] N O V [ 0 0 ] F R Q [ 0 0 0 0 ] S Y N [ 0 ]

The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)

The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.

[ ] OV#1 OV1-A OV1-B OV1-C OV2-A OV2-B OV2-C OV3-A OV3-B OV3-C OV elements OV#2 OV4-A OV4-B OV4-C OV elements UV#1 UV1-A UV1-B UV1-C UV2-A UV2-B UV2-C UV3-A UV3-B UV3-C UV elements UV#2 UV4-A UV4-B UV4-C UV elements ZOV ZOV1 ZOV2 ZOV elements NOV NOV1 NOV2 NOV elements FRQ FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FRQ elements SYN SYN SYN elements

⎯ 70 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element is in operation.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRD130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input signal clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.

/ 2 T i m e s y n c . B I : A c t . I R I G : I n a c t . I E C : I n a c t . ∗ S N T P : A c t . ( S r v 1 )

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.

/ 2 1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1 2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9 L o c Loc:Local, BI:BI, IRI:IRIG-B, IEC:IEC103, SNT:SNTP M i n u t e 5 6 _ H o u r 2 2 D a y 1 2 M o n t h 1 1 Y e a r 2 0 0 9

Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is running locally. When [BI], [IRI], [IEC], [SNT] or [RSM] is active, the adjustment is invalid.

• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing

⎯ 71 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

the CANCEL key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.

/ 2 L C D c o n t r a s t

• Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)

Record setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.

• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.

/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w ) • V e r s i o n • D e s c r i p t i o n • C o m m s • R e c o r d • S t a t u s • P r o t e c t i o n • B i n a r y I / P • B i n a r y O / P • L E D

• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n • R e l a y t y p e

⎯ 72 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• S e r i a l N o . • S o f t w a r e

• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.

G R D 1 3 0 - 4 1 0 D - 1 0 - A 0

• Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.

• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.

• M a i n s o f t w a r e G S P D M 1 - 0 3 - ∗ • I E C 6 1 8 5 0 e n g . G ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ - ∗ ∗ - ∗ • P L C d a t a P G R D 1 3 0 D ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ( ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ) • I E C 1 0 3 d a t a I G R D 1 3 0 D ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ( ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ) • I E C 6 1 8 5 0 d a t a X G R D 1 3 0 D ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ( ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ) • G O O S E s u b s c . Y G R Z 1 0 0 D ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ( ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ )

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and "LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)

Recording setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION

Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group", "scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between

⎯ 73 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.

Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:

- To enter a selected item

- To enter a text string

- To enter numerical values

To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.

The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.

/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e ) • P a s s w o r d • D e s c r i p t i o n • C o m m s • R e c o r d • S t a t u s • P r o t e c t i o n • B i n a r y I / P • B i n a r y O / P • L E D

• Move the cursor to a setting item.

• Press the ENTER key.

To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n • P l a n t n a m e • D e s c r i p t i o n

To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "→" and "←" on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22 characters can be entered.

_ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ←→ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ←→

⎯ 74 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ←→ ( ) [ ] @ _ { } ∗ / + − < = > ! “ # $ % & ‘ : ; , . ˆ `

• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.

• Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.

• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new character.

• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.

To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.

/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r T i m e s 2 . 0 _ O V V 1 2 0 . 0 U V V 6 0 . 0 Z O V V 2 0 . 0 N O V V 2 0 . 0

• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Press the or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or key.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.

• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical value.

• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the and keys and enter the new numerical value.

⎯ 75 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.

To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the following steps.

• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password

For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.

• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

/ 2 P a s s w o r d • S e t t i n g • T e s t

• Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.

• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

I n p u t [ _ ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←

• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

R e t y p e [ _ ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←

• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

• Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.

⎯ 76 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change screens.

If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.

P a s s w o r d [ _ ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRD130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.

• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n • P l a n t n a m e • D e s c r i p t i o n • A l a r m 1 T e x t • A l a r m 2 T e x t • A l a r m 3 T e x t • A l a r m 4 T e x t

• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.

• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.

• To enter the name for Alarm∗, select "Alarm∗" on the "Description" screen.

_ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ←→ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ←→ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ←→ ( ) [ ] @ _ { } ∗ / + − < =

⎯ 77 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

> ! “ # $ % & ‘ : ; , . ˆ `

• Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.

4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103 communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s . • A d d r . / P a r a m . • S w i t c h

• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.

/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m I E C 2 _ S Y A D J 0 I P 1 - 1 1 9 2 I P 1 - 2 1 6 8 I P 1 - 3 1 9 I P 1 - 4 1 7 2 S M 1 - 1 2 5 5 S M 1 - 2 2 5 5 S M 1 - 3 2 5 5 S M 1 - 4 0 G W 1 - 1 1 9 2 G W 1 - 2 1 6 8 G W 1 - 3 1 9 G W 1 - 4 1 : : S I 4 - 1 0 S I 4 - 2 0 S I 4 - 3 0 S I 4 - 4 0

⎯ 78 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

S M O D E 0 D E A D T m i n 1 2 0 G O I N T s 6 0 P G 1 - 1 0 P G 1 - 2 0 P G 1 - 3 0 P G 1 - 4 0 P G 2 - 1 0 P G 2 - 2 0 P G 2 - 3 0 P G 2 - 4 0

• Enter the address number on "IEC" column for IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time synchronization of protocol used (−: lags the time, +: leads the time). Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are available. Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0". Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time. Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response is checked.

IP address: ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗

IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4

SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.

• Press the ENTER key.

CAUTION: Do not overlap the relay address number.

• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.

/ 3 S w i t c h . 2 3 2 C 0 9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6 I E C B R 1 9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2 I E C B L K 0 N o r m a l / B l o c k e d 8 5 0 B L K 0 N o r m a l / B l o c k e d

⎯ 79 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

8 5 0 A U T 0 O f f / O n T S T M O D 0 O f f / O n G S E C H K O f f / O n P I N G C H K O f f / O n

• Select the number and press the ENTER key.

<232C>

This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.

Note: default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.

<IECBR>

This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.

<IECBLK>

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC60870-5-103 communication.

<850BLK>

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC61850 communication.

<850AUT>

With IEC61850 communication, GRD130 provides access restriction which permits a client access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password). The password is a 4-digit number shared with RSM100.

Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.

<TSTMOD>

Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.

<GSECHK>

This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file cannot be received.

Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.

<PINGCHK>

This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address which is set on PG∗-∗.

Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

⎯ 80 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.

/ 2 R e c o r d • E . r e c o r d • D . r e c o r d • C o u n t e r

Setting the event recording • Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.

/ 3 E . r e c o r d B I T R N 1 0 0 _ E V 1 3 0 0 1 _ E V 2 3 0 0 2 _ E V 3 3 0 0 3 _ : : E V 1 2 7 3 1 2 7 _ E V 1 2 8 3 1 2 8 _

<BITRN> Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered, both status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is recorded for EV21 to EV128 events.

<EV∗> Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record as the event. It is recommended that this setting can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen. (Refer to Section 3.4.2.)

Setting the disturbance recording • Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.

/ 3 D . r e c o r d • T i m e / s t a r t e r • S c h e m e s w • B i n a r y s i g .

• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r T i m e s 2 . 0 _ O V V 1 2 0 . 0 U V V 6 0 . 0

⎯ 81 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Z O V V 2 0 . 0 N O V V 2 0 . 0

• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w T r i p 1 _ O f f / O n O V 1 O f f / O n U V 1 O f f / O n Z O V 1 O f f / O n N O V 1 O f f / O n

• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:

• Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.

/ 4 B i n a r y s i g . S I G 1 3 0 0 1 _ S I G 2 3 0 0 2 S I G 3 3 0 0 3 S I G 3 2 3 0 3 2

• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix C.

Setting the counter • Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 3 C o u n t e r • S c h e m e s w • A l a r m s e t

To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w T C S P E N 0 _ O f f / O n / O p t - O n T C A E N 0 O f f / O n

⎯ 82 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set threshold setting, do the following:

• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.

/ 4 A l a r m s e t T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0 _

• Enter the threshold settings.

4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s • M e t e r i n g • T i m e s y n c . • T i m e z o n e

Setting the metering • Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

D i s p l a y 0 _

P r i m . / S e c o n d .

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Prim.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).

Enter 1(=Second.) to display the secondary side current.

Setting the time synchronisation The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, RSM clock, or by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.

• Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c 0 _

O f / B I / I R I / I E C / S N

• Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=of) not to be synchronised with any external signals.

Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.

Enter 2(=IRI) to be synchronised with IRIG-B time signal.

Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.

Enter 4(=SN) to be synchronised with SNTP.

Note: When selecting BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, check that they are active on the

⎯ 83 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

"Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu. If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will

become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.) If it is set to an inactive BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform GMT to the local time.

• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.

/ 3 T i m e z o n e

G M T h r s + 9 _ G M T m M i n + 0

• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs) and GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRD130 can have 8 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the following:

• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n • C h a n g e a c t . g p . • C h a n g e s e t . • C o p y g p .

Changing the active group • Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.

/ 3 C h a n g e a c t . g p . A c t i v e g p . 1 _

• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.

Changing the settings Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the default values, see Appendix H. To change the settings, do the following:

• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.

/ 3 A c t g p . = ∗ • C o m m o n • G r o u p 1 • G r o u p 2 • G r o u p 3 • G r o u p 4 • G r o u p 5 • G r o u p 6

⎯ 84 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• G r o u p 7 • G r o u p 8

Changing the Common settings • Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the

ENTER key.

<Model 210>

/ 4 C o m m o n A P P L 1 _ 1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P A P P L V E S O f f / V e / V s V 2 S V E N 2 O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M A O L E D 1 O f f / O n

<Model 4210>

/ 4 C o m m o n A P P L 1 _ 3 P N / 3 P P / 2 P P A P P L V E S O f f / V e / V s V 0 S V E N 2 O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M V 2 S V E N 2 O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M A O L E D 1 O f f / O n

<APPL> • Enter 0(=1PP or 3PN), 1(=1PN or 3PP), or 2(=2PP) to set the voltage input state and press the

ENTER key.

<APPLVES> • Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=Ve: used zero-sequence voltage is input directly) or 2(=Vs: used

voltage for synchronism check) and press the ENTER key.

<AOLED> This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.

• Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

< V0SVEN, V2SVEN> To set AC input imbalance supervision enable, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the or key and press the ENTER key.

⎯ 85 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Changing the Group settings

• Select the "Group∗" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 G r o u p ∗ • P a r a m e t e r • T r i p

Setting the parameter Enter the line name, the CT/VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:

• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.

/ 5 P a r a m e t e r • L i n e n a m e • V T r a t i o

• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen. • Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key. • Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.

/ 6 V T r a t i o P V T 1 0 0 V E S V T for Ve or Vs 1 0 0

• Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.

Setting the trip function To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.

• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/ 5 T r i p • S c h e m e s w • P r o t . e l e m e n t

Setting the scheme switch • Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 6 S c h e m e s w • O V • U V • Z O V • N O V • F R Q • S Y N

Setting the OV protection The settings for the OV protection are as follows:

• Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V

⎯ 86 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

O V 1 E N 0 _ O f f / D T / I D M T / C O V 2 E N 0 O f f / D T / I D M T / C O V 3 E N 0 O f f / O n O V 4 E N 0 O f f / O n

<OV1EN>, <OV2EN> To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<OV3EN>, <OV4EN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3 or OV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3 or OV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the UV protection The settings for the UV protection are as follows:

• Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V U V 1 E N 1 _ O f f / D T / I D M T / C U V 2 E N 1 O f f / D T / I D M T / C U V 3 E N 0 O f f / O n U V 4 E N 0 O f f / O n V B L K E N 0 O f f / O n

<UV1EN>, <UV2EN> To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<UV3EN>, <UV4EN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3 or UV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3 or UV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

⎯ 87 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

<VBLKEN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the ZOV protection The settings for the ZOV protection are as follows:

• Select "ZOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.

/ 7 Z O V Z O V 1 E N 1 _ O f f / D T / I D M T / C Z O V 2 E N 0 O f f / D T / I D M T / C

<ZOV1EN>, <ZOV2EN> To set the ZOV1 and ZOV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the ZOV1 or ZOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the NOV protection The settings for the NOV protection are as follows:

• Select "NOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOV" screen.

/ 7 N O V N O V 1 E N 1 _ O f f / D T / I D M T / C N O V 2 E N 0 O f f / D T / I D M T / C

<NOV1EN>, <NOV2EN> To set the NOV1 and NOV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NOV1 or NOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

⎯ 88 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the FRQ protection The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:

• Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q F R Q 1 E N 0 _ O f f / O F / U F F R Q 2 E N 0 O f f / O F / U F F R Q 3 E N 0 O f f / O F / U F F R Q 4 E N 0 O f f / O F / U F D F R Q 1 E N 0 O f f / R / D D F R Q 2 E N 0 O f f / R / D D F R Q 3 E N 0 O f f / R / D D F R Q 4 E N 0 O f f / R / D

<FRQ∗EN>

To set the FRQ∗ scheme enable, do the following.

• Enter 1(=OF, overfrequency) or 2(=UF, underfrequency) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the FRQ∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<DFRQ∗EN>

To set the FRQ∗ scheme enable, do the following.

• Enter 1(=R, frequency rise rate) or 2(=UF, frequency decay rate) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the FRQ∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the SYN function The settings for the SYN function are as follows:

• Select "SYN" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SYN" screen.

/ 7 S Y N V C H K 0 O f f / L D / D L / D D / S D f E N 0 O f f / O n V T P H S E L 0 A / B / C V T - R A T E 0

⎯ 89 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

P H - G / P H - P H V E S - R A T E 0 P H - G / P H - P H 3 P H - V T 0 B u s / L i n e

<VCHK>

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) to perform the reclose without voltage and synchronism check.

Enter 1 (= LD) to perform the reclose under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check.

Enter 2 (= DL) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check.

Enter 3 (= DD) to perform the reclose under "dead bus and dead line" condition.

Enter 4 (= S) to perform the reclose with synchronism check.

<DfEN>

• Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the Δf checking function.

Enter 1 (= On) to use the Δf checking function.

<VTPHSEL>

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= A) not to use A-phase voltage for voltage and synchronism check.

Enter 1 (= B) to use B-phase voltage.

Enter 2 (= C) to use C-phase voltage.

<VT-RATE>

• Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= PH-G) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-earth voltage.

Enter 1 (= PH-PH) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-phase voltage.

<VES-RATE>

• Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= PH-G) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-earth voltage.

Enter 1 (= PH-PH) if the VT rating of the selected above is a phase-to-phase voltage.

<3PH-VT>

• Enter 0 or 1 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Bus) if three-phase voltage is applied to the bus side.

Enter 1 (= Line) if three-phase voltage is applied to the line side..

⎯ 90 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Setting the protection elements To set the protection elements, do the following.

• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.

/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t • O V • U V • Z O V • N O V • F R Q • S Y N

Setting the OV elements • Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V O V 1 V OV1 Threshold setting. 1 2 0 . 0 _ T O V 1 s OV1 Definite time delay. 1 . 0 0 T O V 1 M OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 1 . 0 0 T O V 1 R s OV1 Definite time reset delay. 0 . 0 O V 1 D P R % OV1 DO/PU ratio 9 5 O V 2 V OV2 Threshold setting. 1 4 0 . 0 : : O V 2 D P R % OV2 DO/PU ratio 9 5 O V 3 V OV3 Threshold setting. 2 4 0 . 0 T O V 3 s OV3 Definite time delay. 1 . 0 0 O V 3 D P R % OV3 DO/PU ratio 9 5 O V 4 V OV4 Threshold setting. 1 4 0 . 0 T O V 4 s OV4 Definite time delay. 1 . 0 0 O V 4 D P R % OV4 DO/PU ratio 9 5 O V 1 - k OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 O V 1 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 O V 1 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0 O V 2 - k OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 O V 2 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 O V 2 - C ditto

⎯ 91 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

0 . 0 0 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the UV elements • Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V U V 1 V UV1 Threshold setting. 6 0 . 0 _ T U V 1 s UV1 Definite time delay. 1 . 0 0 T U V 1 M UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 1 . 0 0 T U V 1 R s UV1 Definite time reset delay. 0 . 0 U V 2 V UV2 Threshold setting. 4 0 . 0 T U V 2 s UV2 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 T U V 2 R s UV2 Definite time reset delay. 0 . 0 U V 3 V UV3 Threshold setting. 4 0 . 0 T U V 3 s UV3 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 U V 4 V UV4 Threshold setting. 4 0 . 0 T U V 4 s UV4 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 V B L K V UV Blocking threshold 1 0 . 0 U V 1 - k UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 U V 1 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 U V 1 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0 U V 2 - k UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 U V 2 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 U V 2 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

⎯ 92 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the ZOV elements • Select "ZOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.

/ 7 Z O V Z O V 1 V ZOV1 Threshold setting. 2 0 . 0 _ T Z O V 1 s ZOV1 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 T Z O V 1 M ZOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 1 . 0 0 T Z O V 1 R s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay.

0 . 0 Z O V 2 V ZOV2 Threshold setting. 4 0 . 0 T Z O V 2 s ZOV2 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 T Z O V 2 M ZOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 1 . 0 0 T Z O V 2 R s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay. 0 . 0 Z O V 1 - k ZOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 Z O V 1 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 Z O V 1 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0 Z O V 2 - k ZOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 Z O V 2 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 Z O V 2 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the NOV protection elements • Select "NOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOV" screen.

/ 7 N O V N O V 1 V NOV1 Threshold setting. 2 0 . 0 _ T N O V 1 s NOV1 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 T N O V 1 M NOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.

⎯ 93 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1 . 0 0 T N O V 1 R s NOV1 Definite time reset delay.

0 . 0 N O V 2 V NOV2 Threshold setting. 4 0 . 0 T N O V 2 s NOV2 Definite time setting. 1 . 0 0 T N O V 2 M NOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 1 . 0 0 T N O V 2 R s NOV2 Definite time reset delay. 0 . 0 N O V 1 - k NOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 N O V 1 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 N O V 1 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0 N O V 2 - k NOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 1 . 0 0 N O V 2 - α ditto 1 . 0 0 N O V 2 - C ditto 0 . 0 0 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the FRQ elements • Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q F R Q 1 H z − 1 . 0 0 _ T F R Q 1 1 . 0 0 F R Q 2 H z − 1 . 0 0 T F R Q 2 1 . 0 0 F R Q 3 H z − 1 . 0 0 T F R Q 3 1 . 0 0 F R Q 4 H z − 1 . 0 0 _ T F R Q 4 1 . 0 0 F V B L K V UV Blocking threshold 4 0 . 0 D F R Q 1 H z s 0 . 5

⎯ 94 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

D F R Q 2 H z s 0 . 5 D F R Q 3 H z s 0 . 5 D F R Q 4 H z s 0 . 5

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting SYN function • Select "SYN" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SYN" screen.

/ 7 S Y N

O V B V 5 1 U V B V 1 3 O V L V 5 1 U V L V 1 3 S Y N U V V 8 3 S Y N O V V 5 1 S Y N D V V 1 5 0 S Y N θ d e g 3 0 S Y N D f H z 1 . 0 0 T S Y N s 1 . 0 0 T L B D L s 0 . 0 5 T D B L L s 0 . 0 5 T D B D L s 0 . 0 5 O C - C O A 1 . 0 0 E F - C O A 0 . 3 0 S E - C O A 0 . 0 1 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

⎯ 95 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.

Setting group copy To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:

• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.

/ 3 C o p y A t o B A _ B

• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.

• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / P . B I 1 . B I 2 . B I 3 . B I 4 . B I 5 . B I 6 . B I 7 . B I 8

Selection of Binary Input • Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.

/ 3 B I ∗ • T i m e r s • F u n c t i o n s

Setting timers • Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.

/ 4 T i m e r s P U D s Pick-up delay setting 0 . 0 0 _ D O D s Drop-off delay setting 0 . 0 0

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

⎯ 96 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.

Setting Functions • Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s S N S 1 _ N o r m / I n v

• To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.

4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRD130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix C.

It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

Appendix H shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay • Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P • B O 1 • B O 2 • B O 3 • B O 4 • B O 5 • B O 6 • B O 7

Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗" screen.

/ 3 B O ∗ • L o g i c / R e s e t • F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer • Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

⎯ 97 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

L o g i c 0 _ O R / A N D R e s e t 0 I n s / D l / D w / L a t

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals • Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s I n # 1 1 0 0 0 _ I n # 2 1 0 0 1 I n # 3 1 0 0 2 I n # 4 1 0 0 3 I n # 5 1 0 0 4 I n # 6 1 0 0 5 T B O s 0 . 2 0

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 (signal names: "BO1 OP" to "BO7 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.10 LEDs

Six LEDs of the GRD130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix C can be assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs • Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

⎯ 98 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

/ 2 L E D • L E D • V i r t u a l L E D

Selection of real LEDs • Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D • L E D 1 • L E D 2 • L E D 3 • L E D 4 • L E D 5 • L E D 6

• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.

/ 4 L E D ∗ • L o g i c / R e s e t • F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and reset type • Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t L o g i c 0 _ O R / A N D R e s e t 0 I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.

Assigning signals • Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s I n # 1 1 0 0 0 _ I n # 2 1 0 0 1 I n # 3 1 0 0 2 I n # 4 1 0 0 3

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix C.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

⎯ 99 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Selection of virtual LEDs • Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D • I N D 1 • I N D 2

• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.

/ 4 I N D ∗ • R e s e t • F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing • Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.

/ 5 R e s e t R e s e t 0 _ I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals • Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s B I T 1 1 0 0 0 _ B I T 2 1 0 0 1 B I T 8 1 0 0 7

• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix C.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.7 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If the

⎯ 100 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

password trap ser, enter the password in the following screen.

P a s s w o r d [ _ ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.

4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

• Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/ 1 T e s t • S w i t c h • B i n a r y O / P • L o g i c c i r c u i t

• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t c h A . M . F . 1 _ O f f / O n U V T S T 0 O f f / O n I E C T S T 0 O f f / O n

• Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103 communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P B O 1 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 2 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

⎯ 101 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

B O 3 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 4 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 5 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 6 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 7 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e F A I L 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.

• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix C with monitoring jacks A and B.

• Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

/ 2 L o g i c c i r c u i t T e r m A 1 _ T e r m B 1 0 0 1 _

• Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.

• Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.

After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.

On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.

⎯ 102 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel. On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.

• Display of current and voltage waveforms: Oscillograph display

• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual relays via Ethernet LAN networks using a remote PC as shown in Figure 4.4.1.

TCP/IP (LAN cable) HUB

Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

⎯ 103 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRD130 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)

• Measurand data: voltage, frequency

• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.

The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2 and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.

For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.

4.6 IEC 61850 Communication

GRD130 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard. Station bus communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within substation control and automation systems via Ethernet LAN.

Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC 61850 communication.

Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network

⎯ 104 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.7 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

• Event records

• Disturbance records

• Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. This can be selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).

The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.

Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the number of seconds is incremented).

When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected "RSM" in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

corrected to (n+1) sec 500ms

n sec (n+1) sec

corrected to n sec

t

⎯ 105 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

5. Installation 5.1 Receipt of Relays

When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting

A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix F shows the case outline.

For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION

Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands. Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.

5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.

The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

CAUTION

• Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.

• Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.

• Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

• Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.

• Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.

⎯ 106 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried out in a Special Handling Area.

5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.

⎯ 107 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRD130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits function when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces Binary input circuits and output circuits AC input circuits

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.

Measuring elements Metering and recording

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external equipment.

The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check Tripping circuit test Reclosing circuit test

⎯ 108 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION

• The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal. Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.

• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach the cover provided on top of it.

• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing

CAUTION

• While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit. • Before turning on the power, check the following:

- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct. - Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited. • Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage. • If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

⎯ 109 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source 1 Three-phase voltage source 1 DC power supply 3 Phase angle meter 3 AC ammeter 3 AC voltmeter 1 Time counter, precision timer 1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the default settings.

For the default settings, see the Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet.

Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.

Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay. RSM100 software is required to run the PC.

For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

⎯ 110 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current and voltage sources are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD display

• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.

Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.

• Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole screen.

LED display

• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.

• Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)

VIEW and RESET keys

• Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering" screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.

• Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.

Other operation keys

• Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Repeat this for all keys.

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

⎯ 111 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GRD130-A1 TB2

- B1

DC power supply

+

−

BI1BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6BI7BI8

-A9

- B9

E

TB2

- A8

-B8

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

• Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2. Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P B O 1 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 2 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 3 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 4 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 5 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 6 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 7 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e F A I L 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

⎯ 112 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.

O p e r a t e ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.

1

DC power supply

+

−

- A9

- B9

E

TB2

TB -1 -2

GRD130

Single-phase voltage source

V

-3 -4

(a) Testing Circuit for Model 210

V A

V B

V C

TB1

DC power supply

+

−

-A9

-B9

E

TB2

GRD130

-1 -2 -3

Three-phase voltage source

V

-4

-5 -6

Single-phase voltage source

-7

-8

V

(b) Testing Circuit for Model 410

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit

To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.

⎯ 113 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

"Set. (view)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen

If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen

Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen

• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.

⎯ 114 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.5 Function Test

CAUTION The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays. Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall characteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.

/ 2 L o g i c c i r c u i t T e r m A 1 _ T e r m B 4 8 _

When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.

Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for logic level "0".

CAUTION • Use test equipment with more than 1 kΩ of internal impedance when observing the output

signal at the monitoring jacks.

• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.

• Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.

In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] and [APPLVES] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.

Note: Operating time test of measuring relay elements at monitoring jack A or B is not including the operation of binary output. Whole the operating time test, if required, should be measured at a binary output relay.

⎯ 115 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal number are listed below.

Element Signal No. OV11 OV2-1 OV3-1 OV4-1 UV1-1 UV2-1 UV3-1 UV4-1 ZOV1 ZOV2

51 54 57 518 60 63 66 528 93 94

• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in Section 6.5.1.

Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, OV4, ZOV1, ZOV2 • Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.

• Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3, UV4 • Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.

• Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZOV1 IDMT curves • Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the

operating time.

TB2

-A9

-B9

E

GRD130

DC powe

supply

+

−

V

TB2 +

− Variable-

Voltage source

-(*)

-(*)

DC voltmeter

+

0V

Monitoring jack

A

0V

( ∗): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

⎯ 116 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.

6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvoltage element NOV1 and NOV2

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.

Three-phase Voltage source

TB2 -A1

-B1

-B2

-A2

Va

Vb

GRD130

-A9

-B9

E

TB2DC power supply

+

−

Vc

V

VN

DC voltmeter

+

0V

Monitoring jack

A

0V

Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No.

NOV1 95 NOV2 96

• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in Section 6.5.1.

• Apply the three-phase balance voltage and the operating voltage value is checked by increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.

Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating time check of NOV1 IDMT curve • Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the

operating time.

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.

⎯ 117 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.

TB2 -A9

-B9

GRD130

DC power supply

+

−

Monitoring jack

A

0V

DC voltmeter

+

−

+

−

-A1

-B2

V TB2f Variable- Frequency / Voltage source

E

Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

Frequency elements and their output signal number are listed below.

Element Signal No. FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FRQBLK

218 219 220 221 222

Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4 • Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in

Section 6.5.1.

• Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.

In case of overfrequency characteristic,

• Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.

In case of underfrequency characteristics,

• Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.

Undervoltage block test, FRQBLK • Apply a rated voltage and change the magnitude of frequency to operate an element.

• Keep the frequency that the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage applied from the rated voltage to less than FRQBLK setting voltage. And then, check that the element resets.

6.5.1.4 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.

⎯ 118 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

DC voltmeter

TB2 -A9

-B9

E

GRD130

DC power supply

+

−

Monitoring jack

A

0V

+

−

Single-phase voltage source

+

−

TB2 -A1

-B2 Single-phase voltage source

+

−

-A3

-B3

φ

V

V

V B

V L

f

f

Figure 6.5.4 Operating Voltage Value Test Circuit

Voltage and synchronism check elements and their output signal number are listed below.

Element Signal No. OVB 534 UVB 536 OVL 533 UVL 535 SYN 532

Voltage check element OVB, UVB, OVL • Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

• Enter a signal number for the Term A line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.

• Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.4.

OVB and UVB :

• Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB2-A3 and -B3 and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

OVL and UVL :

• Adjust the magnitude of the voltage applied to terminal TB-A1 and –B2 and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

Synchronism check element SYN • Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

⎯ 119 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

• Enter a signal number 532 for the TermA line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.

• Apply rated voltages VB and VL as shown Figure 6.5.4.

Voltage check:

• Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set the voltage to any value over the SYNOV setting. (The default setting of SYNOV is 51 V.)

Whilst keeping VL in-phase with VB, increase the single-phase voltage VL from zero volts. Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage is within ± 5% of the SYNUV setting.

• Further increase VL and measure the voltage at that the element resets. Check that the measured voltage is within ±5% of the SYNOV setting.

• To check the SYNDV detector, set the VB to a fixed value and increase the VL from zero volts. Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that | VL − VB| is within ± 5% of the SYNDV setting.

Phase angle check:

• Set the [DfEN] to "OFF", and set VB and VL to any value between the SYNOV and SYNUV settings keeping VB in-phase with VL. Then the SYN element operates.

• Shift the angle of VL from that of VB, and measure the angle at which the element resets.

• Check that the measured angle is within ±5° of the SYNθ setting. (The default setting of SYNθ is 30°.)

• Change VB and VL, and repeat the above.

Frequency difference check:

• Set the [DfEN] to "ON", and set VB and VL to a rated voltage and rated frequency. Then the SYN element operates.

• Shift the frequency of VL and measure the frequency at which the element resets.

• Check that |(frequency of VL) − (frequency of VB)| is within ±5% of the SYNDf setting. (The default setting of SYNDf is 1.00Hz.)

⎯ 120 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.5.2 Protection Scheme

In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.

Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays after a simulated fault occurs.

6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.

Recording events are listed in Appendix D. There are internal events and external events by binary input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

⎯ 121 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system voltage and their phase angle with the metering displays on the LCD screen.

• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.

• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g V a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V e s ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V a b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V b c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V c a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° V 0 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° f ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ H z

Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by the setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)

6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test

The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.

Tripping circuit • Set the breaker to be closed.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P B O 1 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 2 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 3 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 4 0 _

⎯ 122 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 5 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 6 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e B O 7 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e F A I L 0 _ D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

• Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ? E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase breaker is tripped.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Repeat the above for BOs.

⎯ 123 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1 shows LCD messages and failure locations.

The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or cable PLC, IEC61850 data

Err: SUM ×(Flash memory) Err: ROM ×(ROM data) Err: RAM ×(SRAM) Err: CPU ×(CPU) Err: Invalid × Err: NMI × Err: BRAM ×(Backup RAM) Err: EEP ×(EEPROM) Err: A/D ×(A/D converter) Err: SP ×(Sampling) Err: DC ×(DC power supply circuit) Err: TC ×(Tripping circuit)(1) × (2) Err: V0, Err: V2 × (AC input circuit)(1) × (2) Err: CB × (Circuit breaker)(1) × (2) Err: PLC ×(PLC data) Err: MAP ×(IEC61850 mapping data) Err: RTC ×(SNTP setting) Err: LAN ×(Ethernet LAN) Err: GOOSE ×(GOOSE subscribe) Err: Ping ×(Ping response)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.

If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.

⎯ 124 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.

Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following first: - Test circuit connections are correct. - Modules are securely inserted in position. - Correct DC power voltage is applied. - Correct AC inputs are applied. - Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit

If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.

Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level is not recommended.

Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type form) as the removed relay.

The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.

Replacing the relay unit CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

• Disconnect the trip outputs. • Short-circuit all AC current inputs. Open all AC voltage inputs. • Unscrew the relay front cover. • Unscrew the binding screw on the handle. • To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you. (See

Figure 6.7.1.) • Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.

CAUTION To avoid risk of damage: • Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case. • Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit. • Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number

when inserting the relay unit.

WARNING

⎯ 125 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit

6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.

• Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the "ALARM" red LED is not lit.

• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage

The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

IN SERVICE TRIPALARM

VIEW

RESET

A B 0V

END

CEL CAN ENTER

END

IN SERVICE TRIPALARM

VIEW

RESET

A B 0V CEL CAN ENTER

Handle Pull up handle

Bind screw

⎯ 126 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

7. Putting Relay into Service The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.

• Check that all the external connections are correct.

• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are recorded during the tests.

• Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Alarm view" screen.

• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

⎯ 127 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix A

Signal List

⎯ 128 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents

0 CONSTANT_0 constant 01 CONSTANT_1 constant 123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839 OV1-1_INST OV1-1 relay element start40 OV1-2_INST OV1-2 relay element start41 OV1-3_INST OV1-3 relay element start42434445 OV2-1_INST OV2-1 relay element start46 OV2-2_INST OV2-2 relay element start47 OV2-3_INST OV2-3 relay element start48495051 OV1-1 OV1-1 relay element output52 OV1-2 OV1-2 relay element output53 OV1-3 OV1-3 relay element output54 OV2-1 OV2-1 relay element output55 OV2-2 OV2-2 relay element output56 OV2-3 OV2-3 relay element output57 OV3-1 OV3-1 relay element output58 OV3-2 OV3-2 relay element output59 OV3-3 OV3-3 relay element output60 UV1-1 UV1-1 relay element output61 UV1-2 UV1-2 relay element output62 UV1-3 UV1-3 relay element output63 UV2-1 UV2-1 relay element output64 UV2-2 UV2-2 relay element output65 UV2-3 UV2-3 relay element output66 UV3-1 UV3-1 relay element output67 UV3-2 UV3-2 relay element output68 UV3-3 UV3-3 relay element output6970

⎯ 129 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293 ZOV1 ZOV1 relay element ouput94 ZOV2 ZOV2 relay element ouput95 NOV1 NOV1 relay element ouput96 NOV2 NOV2 relay element ouput97 UVBLK UV blocked e lement operating9899

100101 OV1_TRIP OV1 tr ip command 102 OV1-1_TRIP OV1 tr ip command(Phase-1)103 OV1-2_TRIP OV1 tr ip command(Phase-2)104 OV1-3_TRIP OV1 tr ip command(Phase-3)105106107108 OV2_TRIP OV2 tr ip command 109 OV2-1_TRIP OV2 tr ip command(Phase-1)110 OV2-2_TRIP OV2 tr ip command(Phase-2)111 OV2-3_TRIP OV2 tr ip command(Phase-3)112113114115 OV3_TRIP OV3 tr ip command 116 OV3-1_TRIP OV3 tr ip command(Phase-1)117 OV3-2_TRIP OV3 tr ip command(Phase-2)118 OV3-3_TRIP OV3 tr ip command(Phase-3)119120121122 UV1_TRIP UV1 trip command 123 UV1-1_ TR IP UV1 trip command(Phase-1)124 UV1-2_ TR IP UV1 trip command(Phase-2)125 UV1-3_ TR IP UV1 trip command(Phase-3)126127128129 UV2_TRIP UV2 trip command 130 UV2-1_ TR IP UV2 trip command(Phase-1)131 UV2-2_ TR IP UV2 trip command(Phase-2)132 UV2-3_ TR IP UV2 trip command(Phase-3)133134135136 UV3_TRIP UV3 trip command 137 UV3-1_ TR IP UV3 trip command(Phase-1)138 UV3-2_ TR IP UV3 trip command(Phase-2)139 UV3-3_ TR IP UV3 trip command(Phase-3)140

⎯ 130 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAM E Contents141142143 ZOV 1_TRIP ZOV1 trip co mmand144 ZOV 2_ALA RM ZOV2 alarm comman d145 NOV1_TRIP NOV1 tr ip c ommand146 NOV2_ALA RM NOV2 alarm com mand147148149150151152153154155156157 UV1-1_ INS T UV1-1 relay element s tar t158 UV1-2_ INS T UV1-2 relay element s tar t159 UV1-3_ INS T UV1-3 relay element s tar t160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177 UV2-1_ INS T UV2-1 relay element s tar t178 UV2-2_ INS T UV2-2 relay element s tar t179 UV2-3_ INS T UV2-3 relay element s tar t180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197 ZOV 1_INS T ZOV1 relay element star t198 ZOV 2_INS T ZOV2 relay element star t199 NOV1_INST NOV1 relay elem ent start200 NOV2_INST NOV2 relay elem ent start201202203204205206207208209210

⎯ 131 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAM E Contents211212213214215216217218 FRQ1 FRQ1 relay element ouput219 FRQ2 FRQ2 relay element ouput220 FRQ3 FRQ3 relay element ouput221 FRQ4 FRQ4 relay element ouput222 FRQBLK FRQ blocked element operating223224225 DFRQ1 DFRQ1 relay element ouput226 DFRQ2 DFRQ2 relay element ouput227 DFRQ3 DFRQ3 relay element ouput228 DFRQ4 DFRQ4 relay element ouput229230231232233234235236237238239240241242243244245246247248 ZOV_DIST ZOV relay for disturbance record249 NOV_DIST NOV relay for disturbance record250 OV-1_DIST OV-1 relay for disturbance record251 OV-2_DIST OV-2 relay for disturbance record252 OV-3_DIST OV-3 relay for disturbance record253 UV-1_DIST UV-1 relay for disturbance record254 UV-2_DIST UV-2 relay for disturbance record255 UV-3_DIST UV-3 relay for disturbance record256257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275276277278279280

⎯ 132 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296297298299300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316317318319320321322323324325326327328329330331332333334335336337338339340341342343344345346347348349350

⎯ 133 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents351352353354355 FRQ_TRIP FRQ trip command356 FRQ1_TRIP FRQ1 trip command357 FRQ2_TRIP FRQ2 trip command358 FRQ3_TRIP FRQ3 trip command359 FRQ4_TRIP FRQ4 trip command360 DFRQ1_TRIP DFRQ1 trip command361 DFRQ2_TRIP DFRQ2 trip command362 DFRQ3_TRIP DFRQ3 trip command363 DFRQ4_TRIP DFRQ4 trip command364365366367368369370371 GEN.TRIP General trip command372 GEN.TRIP-1 General trip command (1 Phase)373 GEN.TRIP-2 General trip command (2 Phase)374 GEN.TRIP-3 General trip command (3 Phase)375 GEN.TRIP-N General trip command (N Phase)376377378379380 GEN.ALARM General alarm command381 GEN.ALARM-1 General alarm command (1 Phase)382 GEN.ALARM-2 General alarm command (2 Phase)383 GEN.ALARM-3 General alarm command (3 Phase)384 GEN.ALARM-N General alarm command (N Phase)385386387388389390391392393394395396397398399400401402403404405406407408409410411412 VCHK Voltage check for ARC413 VCHK_SYN ditto414 VCHK_LBDL ditto415 VCHK_DBLL ditto416 VCHK_DBDL ditto417418419420

⎯ 134 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435 OV4_ALARM OV4 alarm command 436 OV4-1_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-1)437 OV4-2_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-2)438 OV4-3_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-3)439440441442443 UV4_ALARM UV4 alarm command 444 UV4-1_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-1)445 UV4-2_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-2)446 UV4-3_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-3)447448449450451452453454455456 OV1-OR OV1 relay (3PHASE OR)457 OV2-OR OV2 relay (3PHASE OR)458 OV3-OR OV3 relay (3PHASE OR)459 OV4-OR OV4 relay (3PHASE OR)460 OV1_INST-OR OV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)461 OV2_INST-OR OV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)462 UV1-OR UV1 relay (3PHASE OR)463 UV2-OR UV2 relay (3PHASE OR)464 UV3-OR UV3 relay (3PHASE OR)465 UV4-OR UV4 relay (3PHASE OR)466 UV1_INST-OR UV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)467 UV2_INST-OR UV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)468469470471 BO1_OP Binary output 1472 BO2_OP Binary output 2473 BO3_OP Binary output 3474 BO4_OP Binary output 4475 BO5_OP Binary output 5476 BO6_OP Binary output 6477 BO7_OP Binary output 7478479480481482483484485486487488489490

⎯ 135 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents491492493494495496497498499500501502503504505506507508509510511512513514515516517518 OV4-1 OV4-1 relay element output519 OV4-2 OV4-2 relay element output520 OV4-3 OV4-3 relay element output521522523524525526527528 UV4-1 UV4-1 relay element output529 UV4-2 UV4-2 relay element output530 UV4-3 UV4-3 relay element output531532 SYN Voltage check relay for ARC533 OVL ditto534 OVB ditto535 UVL ditto536 UVB ditto537538539540541542543544545546547548549550 OV1-1_RST OV1 relay element definite time reset551 OV1-2_RST ditto552 OV1-3_RST ditto553 OV2-1_RST OV2 relay element definite time reset554 OV2-2_RST ditto555 OV2-3_RST ditto556 UV1-1_RST UV1 relay element definite time reset557 UV1-2_RST ditto558 UV1-3_RST ditto559 UV2-1_RST UV2 relay element definite time reset560 UV2-2_RST ditto

⎯ 136 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents561 UV2-3_RST ditto562 ZOV1_RST ZOV1 relay element definite time reset563 ZOV2_RST ZOV2 relay element definite time reset564 NOV1_RST NOV1 relay element definite time reset565 NOV2_RST NOV2 relay element definite time reset566 UVBLK-1 UV blocked element operating567 UVBLK-2 ditto568 UVBLK-3 ditto569570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589590591592593594595596597598599600601602603604605606607608609610611612613614615616617618619620621622623624625626627628629630

⎯ 137 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents631632633634635636637638639640641642643644645646647648649650651652653654655656657658659660661662663664665666667668669670671672673674675676677678679680681682683684685686687688689690691692693694695696697698699700

⎯ 138 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents701702703704705706707708709710711712713714715716717718719720721722723724725726727728729730731732733734735736737738739740741742743744745746747748749750751752753754755756757758759760761762763764765766767768 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1769 BI2_COMMAND Binary input signal BI2770 BI3_COMMAND Binary input signal BI3

⎯ 139 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents771 BI4_COMMAND Binary input signal BI4772 BI5_COMMAND Binary input signal BI5773 BI6_COMMAND Binary input signal BI6774 BI7_COMMAND Binary input signal BI7775 BI8_COMMAND Binary input signal BI8776777778779780781782783784785786787788789790791792793794795796797798799800801802803804805 PICKUP_L1 A phase element pick-up for IEC103806 PICKUP_L2 B phase element pick-up for IEC103807 PICKUP_L3 C phase element pick-up for IEC103808 PICKUP_N Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103809810811812813814815816817818819820821822823824825826827828829830831832833834835836837838839840

⎯ 140 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents841842843844845846847848849850851852853854855856857858859860861862863864865866867868869870871872873874875876877878879880881882883884885886887888889890891892893894895896897898899900901902903904905906907908909910

⎯ 141 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents911912913914915916917918919920921922923924925926927928929930931932933934935936937938939940941942943944945946947948949950951952953954955956957958959960961962963964965966967968969970971972973974975976977978979980

⎯ 142 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents98198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040 FAULT_PHA_1 fault_phase_11041 FAULT_PHA_2 fault_phase_21042 FAULT_PHA_3 fault_phase_31043 FAULT_PHA_N fault_phase_N1044104510461047104810491050

⎯ 143 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1051105210531054105510561057105810591060106110621063106410651066106710681069107010711072107310741075107610771078107910801081108210831084108510861087108810891090109110921093109410951096109710981099110011011102110311041105110611071108110911101111111211131114111511161117111811191120

⎯ 144 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1121112211231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381139114011411142114311441145114611471148114911501151115211531154115511561157115811591160116111621163116411651166116711681169117011711172117311741175117611771178117911801181118211831184118511861187118811891190

⎯ 145 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents119111921193119411951196119711981199120012011202120312041205120612071208120912101211121212131214121512161217121812191220122112221223122412251226122712281229123012311232123312341235123612371238123912401241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active1244 GROUP2_ACTIVE group2 active1245 GROUP3_ACTIVE group3 active1246 GROUP4_ACTIVE group4 active1247 GROUP5_ACTIVE group5 active1248 GROUP6_ACTIVE group6 active1249 GROUP7_ACTIVE group7 active1250 GROUP8_ACTIVE group8 active1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK1253 AMF_OFF SV BLOCK12541255125612571258 RELAY_FAIL-A12591260

⎯ 146 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1261 TRIP-H Trip signal hold126212631264 V0_ERR_UF V0 error(unfiltered)1265 V2_ERR_UF V2 error(unfiltered)126612671268 V0_ERR V0 error1269 V2_ERR V2 error1270 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure12711272 TC_ALARM Trip counter alarm1273127412751276127712781279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up12801281128212831284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)1285 BI2_COM_UF Binary input signal BI2 (unfiltered)1286 BI3_COM_UF Binary input signal BI3 (unfiltered)1287 BI4_COM_UF Binary input signal BI4 (unfiltered)1288 BI5_COM_UF Binary input signal BI5 (unfiltered)1289 BI6_COM_UF Binary input signal BI6 (unfiltered)1290 BI7_COM_UF Binary input signal BI7 (unfiltered)1291 BI8_COM_UF Binary input signal BI8 (unfiltered)1292129312941295129612971298129913001301130213031304130513061307130813091310131113121313131413151316131713181319132013211322132313241325132613271328 GOOSE_IN_Q1 Goose Input Quality #11329 GOOSE_IN_Q2 Goose Input Quality #21330 GOOSE_IN_Q3 Goose Input Quality #3

⎯ 147 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1331 GOOSE_IN_Q4 Goose Input Quality #41332 GOOSE_IN_Q5 Goose Input Quality #51333 GOOSE_IN_Q6 Goose Input Quality #61334 GOOSE_IN_Q7 Goose Input Quality #71335 GOOSE_IN_Q8 Goose Input Quality #81336 GOOSE_IN_Q9 Goose Input Quality #91337 GOOSE_IN_Q10 Goose Input Quality #101338 GOOSE_IN_Q11 Goose Input Quality #111339 GOOSE_IN_Q12 Goose Input Quality #121340 GOOSE_IN_Q13 Goose Input Quality #131341 GOOSE_IN_Q14 Goose Input Quality #141342 GOOSE_IN_Q15 Goose Input Quality #151343 GOOSE_IN_Q16 Goose Input Quality #161344 GOOSE_IN_Q17 Goose Input Quality #171345 GOOSE_IN_Q18 Goose Input Quality #181346 GOOSE_IN_Q19 Goose Input Quality #191347 GOOSE_IN_Q20 Goose Input Quality #201348 GOOSE_IN_Q21 Goose Input Quality #211349 GOOSE_IN_Q22 Goose Input Quality #221350 GOOSE_IN_Q23 Goose Input Quality #231351 GOOSE_IN_Q24 Goose Input Quality #241352 GOOSE_IN_Q25 Goose Input Quality #251353 GOOSE_IN_Q26 Goose Input Quality #261354 GOOSE_IN_Q27 Goose Input Quality #271355 GOOSE_IN_Q28 Goose Input Quality #281356 GOOSE_IN_Q29 Goose Input Quality #291357 GOOSE_IN_Q30 Goose Input Quality #301358 GOOSE_IN_Q31 Goose Input Quality #311359 GOOSE_IN_Q32 Goose Input Quality #321360 GOOSE_IN_1 Goose Input #11361 GOOSE_IN_2 Goose Input #21362 GOOSE_IN_3 Goose Input #31363 GOOSE_IN_4 Goose Input #41364 GOOSE_IN_5 Goose Input #51365 GOOSE_IN_6 Goose Input #61366 GOOSE_IN_7 Goose Input #71367 GOOSE_IN_8 Goose Input #81368 GOOSE_IN_9 Goose Input #91369 GOOSE_IN_10 Goose Input #101370 GOOSE_IN_11 Goose Input #111371 GOOSE_IN_12 Goose Input #121372 GOOSE_IN_13 Goose Input #131373 GOOSE_IN_14 Goose Input #141374 GOOSE_IN_15 Goose Input #151375 GOOSE_IN_16 Goose Input #161376 GOOSE_IN_17 Goose Input #171377 GOOSE_IN_18 Goose Input #181378 GOOSE_IN_19 Goose Input #191379 GOOSE_IN_20 Goose Input #201380 GOOSE_IN_21 Goose Input #211381 GOOSE_IN_22 Goose Input #221382 GOOSE_IN_23 Goose Input #231383 GOOSE_IN_24 Goose Input #241384 GOOSE_IN_25 Goose Input #251385 GOOSE_IN_26 Goose Input #261386 GOOSE_IN_27 Goose Input #271387 GOOSE_IN_28 Goose Input #281388 GOOSE_IN_29 Goose Input #291389 GOOSE_IN_30 Goose Input #301390 GOOSE_IN_31 Goose Input #311391 GOOSE_IN_32 Goose Input #32139213931394139513961397139813991400

⎯ 148 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1401 LOCAL_OP_ACT local operation active1402 REMOTE_OP_ACT remote operation active1403 NORM_LED_ON IN-SERVICE LED ON1404 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON1405 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON1406 TEST_LED_ON TEST LED ON14071408 PRG_LED_RESET Latched programmable LED RESET1409 LED_RESET TRIP LED RESET1410141114121413 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command1414 PRG_LED1_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON1415 PRG_LED2_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED2 ON1416 PRG_LED3_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED3 ON1417 PRG_LED4_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED4 ON1418 PRG_LED5_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED5 ON1419 PRG_LED6_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED6 ON 1420 PROGRAMMABLE LED7 ON (reserved)1421 PROGRAMMABLE LED8 ON (reserved)1422 PROGRAMMABLE LED9 ON (reserved)1423 PROGRAMMABLE LED10 ON (reserved)1424 PROGRAMMABLE LED11 ON (reserved)1425 PROGRAMMABLE LED12 ON (reserved)1426 PROGRAMMABLE LED13 ON (reserved)1427 PROGRAMMABLE LED14 ON (reserved)1428 PROGRAMMABLE LED15 ON (reserved)1429 PROGRAMMABLE LED16 ON (reserved)1430 LCD_IND. VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command1431 LCD_IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command1432 LCD_IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command143314341435 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear1436 E.Record_CLR Event record clear1437 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear1438 Data_Lost Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error1439 TP_COUNT_CLR Trip counter cleared144014411442 DEMAND_CLR Demand cleared144314441445 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change1446 IEC103_data_CHG IEC-103 data change1447 IEC850_data_CHG IEC-850 data change1448 Sys.set_change System setting change1449 Rly.set_change Relay setting change1450 Grp.set_change Group setting change145114521453145414551456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed)1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed)1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed)1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed)1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed)14611462146314641465 DC_supply_err DC supply error1466 RTC_err RTC stopped1467 PCI_err PCI bus error1468 GOOSE_stop GOOSE stopped1469 Ping_err Ping no anwer1470 PLC_err PLC stopeed

⎯ 149 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC input No. SIGNAL NAME Contents1471 61850_err 61850 stopped1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error1473 ROM_RAM_err Rom - Ram mismatch error1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory moni toring error1475 BU_RAM_err BU-RAM memory monito ring error14761477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitor ing error14781479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error1480 CPU_err Program erro r1481 Invalid Invalid error1482 NMI NMI1483 Sampling_err Sampling error1484 DIO_err DIO card connection error1485 LAN_err LAN error1486 LCD_err LCD panel connection error1487 ROM_data_err 8M Romdata error148814891490149114921493149414951496149714981499150015011502150315041505150615071508150915101511151215131514151515161517151815191520152115221523152415251526152715281529153015311532153315341535

⎯ 150 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output No. SIGNAL NAME Contents15361537153815391540154115421543154415451546154715481549155015511552155315541555155615571558155915601561156215631564156515661567156815691570157115721573157415751576 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ trip block command1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK ditto1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK ditto1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK ditto15801581158215831584 OV1_BLOCK OV trip block command1585 OV2_BLOCK ditto1586 OV3_BLOCK ditto1587 OV4_BLOCK ditto1588 UV1_BLOCK UV trip block command1589 UV2_BLOCK ditto1590 UV3_BLOCK ditto1591 UV4_BLOCK ditto1592 ZOV1_BLOCK ZOV trip block command1593 ZOV2_BLOCK ditto159415951596 NOV1_BLOCK NOV trip block command1597 NOV2_BLOCK ditto159815991600 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ trip block command1601 FRQ2_BLOCK ditto1602 FRQ3_BLOCK ditto1603 FRQ4_BLOCK ditto16041605

⎯ 151 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIG N AL N AM E C ontents16061607160816091610161116121613161416151616161716181619162016211622162316241625162616271628 EXT _T R IP-1 External tr ip commamd (1 Phase)1629 EXT _T R IP-2 External tr ip commamd (2 Phase)1630 EXT _T R IP-3 External tr ip commamd (3 Phase)1631 EXT _T R IP External tr ip commamd1632 T C _F AIL T r ip c ir cuit F ai l A larm commamd1633163416351636163716381639 IN D .R ESET Indication reset command1640164116421643164416451646164716481649165016511652165316541655165616571658165916601661166216631664 T P_C O U N T -1 T r ip counter count up command1665 T P_C O U N T -2 ditto1666 T P_C O U N T -3 ditto1667 T P_C O U N T ditto16681669167016711672167316741675

⎯ 152 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. S IG N A L N A M E C ontents16761677167816791680 F R Q _S1_T R IP F r eq uency scheme tr ip command ( S tag e1)1681 F R Q _S2_T R IP F r eq uency scheme tr ip command ( S tag e2)1682 F R Q _S3_T R IP F r eq uency scheme tr ip command ( S tag e3)1683 F R Q _S4_T R IP F r eq uency scheme tr ip command ( S tag e4)16841685168616871688168916901691169216931694169516961697169816991700170117021703170417051706170717081709171017111712171317141715171617171718171917201721172217231724172517261727172817291730173117321733173417351736173717381739174017411742

::

2550

⎯ 153 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2551255225532554255525562557255825592560 D ISP.ALAR M 1 Indicate the alarm display2561 D ISP.ALAR M 2 ditto2562 D ISP.ALAR M 3 ditto2563 D ISP.ALAR M 4 ditto2564256525662567256825692570257125722573257425752576 SYN C _C LOC K Synchronise c lock commamd2577257825792580258125822583258425852586258725882589259025912592259325942595259625972598259926002601260226032604260526062607260826092610 ALAR M _LED _SET Alarm LED set2611261226132614261526162617261826192620

⎯ 154 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2621262226232624 F .R EC OR D 1 Fault record stored command 12625 F .R EC OR D 2 22626 F .R EC OR D 3 32627 F .R EC OR D 4 426282629263026312632 D .R EC OR D 1 D isturbance record stored command 12633 D .R EC OR D 2 22634 D .R EC OR D 3 32635 D .R EC OR D 4 426362637263826392640 SET.GR OU P1 Active setting g roup chang ed command (C hang e to g roup1)2641 SET.GR OU P2 22642 SET.GR OU P3 32643 SET.GR OU P4 42644 SET.GR OU P5 52645 SET.GR OU P6 62646 SET.GR OU P7 72647 SET.GR OU P8 8264826492650265126522653265426552656 C ON _TPM D 1 U ser config urable tr ip mode in fault record2657 C ON _TPM D 2 ditto2658 C ON _TPM D 3 ditto2659 C ON _TPM D 4 ditto2660 C ON _TPM D 5 ditto2661 C ON _TPM D 6 ditto2662 C ON _TPM D 7 ditto2663 C ON _TPM D 8 ditto26642665266626672668266926702671267226732674267526762677267826792680268126822683268426852686 PR OT_C OM _R EC V protection inactivate command received 26872688 TPLED _R ST_R C V TR IP LED R ESET command received26892690

⎯ 155 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2691269226932694269526962697269826992700270127022703270427052706270727082709271027112712271327142715271627172718271927202721272227232724272527262727272827292730273127322733273427352736273727382739274027412742274327442745274627472748274927502751275227532754275527562757275827592760

⎯ 156 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents27612762276327642765276627672768276927702771277227732774277527762777277827792780278127822783278427852786278727882789279027912792279327942795279627972798279928002801280228032804280528062807280828092810281128122813281428152816 TEM P0012817 TEM P0022818 TEM P0032819 TEM P0042820 TEM P0052821 TEM P0062822 TEM P0072823 TEM P0082824 TEM P0092825 TEM P0102826 TEM P0112827 TEM P0122828 TEM P0132829 TEM P0142830 TEM P015

⎯ 157 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2831 TEM P0162832 TEM P0172833 TEM P0182834 TEM P0192835 TEM P0202836 TEM P0212837 TEM P0222838 TEM P0232839 TEM P0242840 TEM P0252841 TEM P0262842 TEM P0272843 TEM P0282844 TEM P0292845 TEM P0302846 TEM P0312847 TEM P0322848 TEM P0332849 TEM P0342850 TEM P0352851 TEM P0362852 TEM P0372853 TEM P0382854 TEM P0392855 TEM P0402856 TEM P0412857 TEM P0422858 TEM P0432859 TEM P0442860 TEM P0452861 TEM P0462862 TEM P0472863 TEM P0482864 TEM P0492865 TEM P0502866 TEM P0512867 TEM P0522868 TEM P0532869 TEM P0542870 TEM P0552871 TEM P0562872 TEM P0572873 TEM P0582874 TEM P0592875 TEM P0602876 TEM P0612877 TEM P0622878 TEM P0632879 TEM P0642880 TEM P0652881 TEM P0662882 TEM P0672883 TEM P0682884 TEM P0692885 TEM P0702886 TEM P0712887 TEM P0722888 TEM P0732889 TEM P0742890 TEM P0752891 TEM P0762892 TEM P0772893 TEM P0782894 TEM P0792895 TEM P0802896 TEM P0812897 TEM P0822898 TEM P0832899 TEM P0842900 TEM P085

⎯ 158 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2901 TEM P0862902 TEM P0872903 TEM P0882904 TEM P0892905 TEM P0902906 TEM P0912907 TEM P0922908 TEM P0932909 TEM P0942910 TEM P0952911 TEM P0962912 TEM P0972913 TEM P0982914 TEM P0992915 TEM P1002916 TEM P1012917 TEM P1022918 TEM P1032919 TEM P1042920 TEM P1052921 TEM P1062922 TEM P1072923 TEM P1082924 TEM P1092925 TEM P1102926 TEM P1112927 TEM P1122928 TEM P1132929 TEM P1142930 TEM P1152931 TEM P1162932 TEM P1172933 TEM P1182934 TEM P1192935 TEM P1202936 TEM P1212937 TEM P1222938 TEM P1232939 TEM P1242940 TEM P1252941 TEM P1262942 TEM P1272943 TEM P1282944 TEM P1292945 TEM P1302946 TEM P1312947 TEM P1322948 TEM P1332949 TEM P1342950 TEM P1352951 TEM P1362952 TEM P1372953 TEM P1382954 TEM P1392955 TEM P1402956 TEM P1412957 TEM P1422958 TEM P1432959 TEM P1442960 TEM P1452961 TEM P1462962 TEM P1472963 TEM P1482964 TEM P1492965 TEM P1502966 TEM P1512967 TEM P1522968 TEM P1532969 TEM P1542970 TEM P155

⎯ 159 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output N o. SIGN AL N AM E C ontents2971 TEM P1562972 TEM P1572973 TEM P1582974 TEM P1592975 TEM P1602976 TEM P1612977 TEM P1622978 TEM P1632979 TEM P1642980 TEM P1652981 TEM P1662982 TEM P1672983 TEM P1682984 TEM P1692985 TEM P1702986 TEM P1712987 TEM P1722988 TEM P1732989 TEM P1742990 TEM P1752991 TEM P1762992 TEM P1772993 TEM P1782994 TEM P1792995 TEM P1802996 TEM P1812997 TEM P1822998 TEM P1832999 TEM P1843000 TEM P1853001 TEM P1863002 TEM P1873003 TEM P1883004 TEM P1893005 TEM P1903006 TEM P1913007 TEM P1923008 TEM P1933009 TEM P1943010 TEM P1953011 TEM P1963012 TEM P1973013 TEM P1983014 TEM P1993015 TEM P2003016 TEM P2013017 TEM P2023018 TEM P2033019 TEM P2043020 TEM P2053021 TEM P2063022 TEM P2073023 TEM P2083024 TEM P2093025 TEM P2103026 TEM P2113027 TEM P2123028 TEM P2133029 TEM P2143030 TEM P2153031 TEM P2163032 TEM P2173033 TEM P2183034 TEM P2193035 TEM P2203036 TEM P2213037 TEM P2223038 TEM P2233039 TEM P2243040 TEM P225

⎯ 160 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PLC output No. SIGNAL NAM E Contents3041 TE MP2 263042 TE MP2 273043 TE MP2 283044 TE MP2 293045 TE MP2 303046 TE MP2 313047 TE MP2 323048 TE MP2 333049 TE MP2 343050 TE MP2 353051 TE MP2 363052 TE MP2 373053 TE MP2 383054 TE MP2 393055 TE MP2 403056 TE MP2 413057 TE MP2 423058 TE MP2 433059 TE MP2 443060 TE MP2 453061 TE MP2 463062 TE MP2 473063 TE MP2 483064 TE MP2 493065 TE MP2 503066 TE MP2 513067 TE MP2 523068 TE MP2 533069 TE MP2 543070 TE MP2 553071 TE MP2 56

⎯ 161 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

For IEC61850

Measure Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS0 Va_mag Va magnitude1 Vb_mag Vb magnitude2 Vc_mag Vc magnitude3 Va_ang Va angle4 Vb_ang Vb angle5 Vc_ang Vc angle6 Ves_mag Ves magnitude7 Ves_ang Ves angle8 Vab_mag Vab magnitude9 Vbc_mag Vbc magnitude

10 Vca_mag Vca magnitude11 Vab_ang Vab angle12 Vbc_ang Vbc angle13 Vca_ang Vca angle14 V1_mag V1 magnitude15 V2_mag V2 magnitude16 V0_mag V0 magnitude17 V1_ang V1 angle18 V2_ang V2 angle19 V0_ang V0 angle20 Freq Frequency

⎯ 162 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Setting Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS0 GROUP_NO number of groups1 ACT_GROUP active group number2 EDIT_GROUP edit group number3 CHG_GROUP change active group456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990 1A2_5A1 1A:2 5A:191 1A1_5A2 1A:1 5A:292 1A1_5A0 1A:1 5A:093 1A0_5A1 1A:0 5A:194 1A3_5A2 1A:3 5A:29596979899

100 SoftType Software type101 MappingName Mapping info102 Vendor venfor name103104105106107108109110 Const0 Always 0111 Const1 Always 1112 Const2 Always 2113 Const3 Always 3114115116117118

119

⎯ 163 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Status Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS0 GOOSE_V_001 GOOSE_Value_0011 GOOSE_V_002 GOOSE_Value_0022 GOOSE_V_003 GOOSE_Value_0033 GOOSE_V_004 GOOSE_Value_0044 GOOSE_V_005 GOOSE_Value_0055 GOOSE_V_006 GOOSE_Value_0066 GOOSE_V_007 GOOSE_Value_0077 GOOSE_V_008 GOOSE_Value_0088 GOOSE_V_009 GOOSE_Value_0099 GOOSE_V_010 GOOSE_Value_010

10 GOOSE_V_011 GOOSE_Value_01111 GOOSE_V_012 GOOSE_Value_01212 GOOSE_V_013 GOOSE_Value_01313 GOOSE_V_014 GOOSE_Value_01414 GOOSE_V_015 GOOSE_Value_01515 GOOSE_V_016 GOOSE_Value_01616 GOOSE_V_017 GOOSE_Value_01717 GOOSE_V_018 GOOSE_Value_01818 GOOSE_V_019 GOOSE_Value_01919 GOOSE_V_020 GOOSE_Value_02020 GOOSE_V_021 GOOSE_Value_02121 GOOSE_V_022 GOOSE_Value_02222 GOOSE_V_023 GOOSE_Value_02323 GOOSE_V_024 GOOSE_Value_02424 GOOSE_V_025 GOOSE_Value_02525 GOOSE_V_026 GOOSE_Value_02626 GOOSE_V_027 GOOSE_Value_02727 GOOSE_V_028 GOOSE_Value_02828 GOOSE_V_029 GOOSE_Value_02929 GOOSE_V_030 GOOSE_Value_03030 GOOSE_V_031 GOOSE_Value_03131 GOOSE_V_032 GOOSE_Value_03232 GOOSE_V_033 GOOSE_Value_03333 GOOSE_V_034 GOOSE_Value_03434 GOOSE_V_035 GOOSE_Value_03535 GOOSE_V_036 GOOSE_Value_03636 GOOSE_V_037 GOOSE_Value_03737 GOOSE_V_038 GOOSE_Value_03838 GOOSE_V_039 GOOSE_Value_03939 GOOSE_V_040 GOOSE_Value_04040 GOOSE_V_041 GOOSE_Value_04141 GOOSE_V_042 GOOSE_Value_04242 GOOSE_V_043 GOOSE_Value_04343 GOOSE_V_044 GOOSE_Value_04444 GOOSE_V_045 GOOSE_Value_04545 GOOSE_V_046 GOOSE_Value_04646 GOOSE_V_047 GOOSE_Value_04747 GOOSE_V_048 GOOSE_Value_04848 GOOSE_V_049 GOOSE_Value_04949 GOOSE_V_050 GOOSE_Value_05050 GOOSE_V_051 GOOSE_Value_051

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS51 GOOSE_V_052 GOOSE_Value_05252 GOOSE_V_053 GOOSE_Value_05353 GOOSE_V_054 GOOSE_Value_05454 GOOSE_V_055 GOOSE_Value_05555 GOOSE_V_056 GOOSE_Value_05656 GOOSE_V_057 GOOSE_Value_05757 GOOSE_V_058 GOOSE_Value_05858 GOOSE_V_059 GOOSE_Value_05959 GOOSE_V_060 GOOSE_Value_06060 GOOSE_V_061 GOOSE_Value_06161 GOOSE_V_062 GOOSE_Value_06262 GOOSE_V_063 GOOSE_Value_06363 GOOSE_V_064 GOOSE_Value_06464 GOOSE_V_065 GOOSE_Value_06565 GOOSE_V_066 GOOSE_Value_06666 GOOSE_V_067 GOOSE_Value_06767 GOOSE_V_068 GOOSE_Value_06868 GOOSE_V_069 GOOSE_Value_06969 GOOSE_V_070 GOOSE_Value_07070 GOOSE_V_071 GOOSE_Value_07171 GOOSE_V_072 GOOSE_Value_07272 GOOSE_V_073 GOOSE_Value_07373 GOOSE_V_074 GOOSE_Value_07474 GOOSE_V_075 GOOSE_Value_07575 GOOSE_V_076 GOOSE_Value_07676 GOOSE_V_077 GOOSE_Value_07777 GOOSE_V_078 GOOSE_Value_07878 GOOSE_V_079 GOOSE_Value_07979 GOOSE_V_080 GOOSE_Value_08080 GOOSE_V_081 GOOSE_Value_08181 GOOSE_V_082 GOOSE_Value_08282 GOOSE_V_083 GOOSE_Value_08383 GOOSE_V_084 GOOSE_Value_08484 GOOSE_V_085 GOOSE_Value_08585 GOOSE_V_086 GOOSE_Value_08686 GOOSE_V_087 GOOSE_Value_08787 GOOSE_V_088 GOOSE_Value_08888 GOOSE_V_089 GOOSE_Value_08989 GOOSE_V_090 GOOSE_Value_09090 GOOSE_V_091 GOOSE_Value_09191 GOOSE_V_092 GOOSE_Value_09292 GOOSE_V_093 GOOSE_Value_09393 GOOSE_V_094 GOOSE_Value_09494 GOOSE_V_095 GOOSE_Value_09595 GOOSE_V_096 GOOSE_Value_09696 GOOSE_V_097 GOOSE_Value_09797 GOOSE_V_098 GOOSE_Value_09898 GOOSE_V_099 GOOSE_Value_09999 GOOSE_V_100 GOOSE_Value_100

100 GOOSE_V_101 GOOSE_Value_101101 GOOSE_V_102 GOOSE_Value_102

⎯ 164 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS101 GOOSE_V_102 GOOSE_Value_102102 GOOSE_V_103 GOOSE_Value_103103 GOOSE_V_104 GOOSE_Value_104104 GOOSE_V_105 GOOSE_Value_105105 GOOSE_V_106 GOOSE_Value_106106 GOOSE_V_107 GOOSE_Value_107107 GOOSE_V_108 GOOSE_Value_108108 GOOSE_V_109 GOOSE_Value_109109 GOOSE_V_110 GOOSE_Value_110110 GOOSE_V_111 GOOSE_Value_111111 GOOSE_V_112 GOOSE_Value_112112 GOOSE_V_113 GOOSE_Value_113113 GOOSE_V_114 GOOSE_Value_114114 GOOSE_V_115 GOOSE_Value_115115 GOOSE_V_116 GOOSE_Value_116116 GOOSE_V_117 GOOSE_Value_117117 GOOSE_V_118 GOOSE_Value_118118 GOOSE_V_119 GOOSE_Value_119119 GOOSE_V_120 GOOSE_Value_120120 GOOSE_V_121 GOOSE_Value_121121 GOOSE_V_122 GOOSE_Value_122122 GOOSE_V_123 GOOSE_Value_123123 GOOSE_V_124 GOOSE_Value_124124 GOOSE_V_125 GOOSE_Value_125125 GOOSE_V_126 GOOSE_Value_126126 GOOSE_V_127 GOOSE_Value_127127 GOOSE_V_128 GOOSE_Value_128128 XCBR_POS0 XCBR_POS0129130131132133134135 LEDRST_EXEC LEDRST_EXEC136 RREC1 RREC1137138139 XCBR_OPCNT0 XCBR_OPCNT0140141142143144145146147148149150 HEALTH HEALTH

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176 DIRMODE_OC1 DIRMODE_OC1177 DIRMODE_OC2 DIRMODE_OC2178 DIRMODE_OC3 DIRMODE_OC3179 DIRMODE_OC4 DIRMODE_OC4180 DIRMODE_EF1 DIRMODE_EF1181 DIRMODE_EF2 DIRMODE_EF2182 DIRMODE_EF3 DIRMODE_EF3183 DIRMODE_EF4 DIRMODE_EF4184 DIRMODE_SEF1 DIRMODE_SEF1185 DIRMODE_SEF2 DIRMODE_SEF2186 DIRMODE_SEF3 DIRMODE_SEF3187 DIRMODE_SEF4 DIRMODE_SEF4188 DIRMODE_NOC1 DIRMODE_NOC1189 DIRMODE_NOC2 DIRMODE_NOC2190191192193194195196197198199200 MOD_001 IEC-MODE_001

⎯ 165 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS201 MOD_002 IEC-MODE_002202 MOD_003 IEC-MODE_003203 MOD_004 IEC-MODE_004204 MOD_005 IEC-MODE_005205 MOD_006 IEC-MODE_006206 MOD_007 IEC-MODE_007207 MOD_008 IEC-MODE_008208 MOD_009 IEC-MODE_009209 MOD_010 IEC-MODE_010210 MOD_011 IEC-MODE_011211 MOD_012 IEC-MODE_012212 MOD_013 IEC-MODE_013213 MOD_014 IEC-MODE_014214 MOD_015 IEC-MODE_015215 MOD_016 IEC-MODE_016216 MOD_017 IEC-MODE_017217 MOD_018 IEC-MODE_018218 MOD_019 IEC-MODE_019219 MOD_020 IEC-MODE_020220 MOD_021 IEC-MODE_021221 MOD_022 IEC-MODE_022222 MOD_023 IEC-MODE_023223 MOD_024 IEC-MODE_024224 MOD_025 IEC-MODE_025225 MOD_026 IEC-MODE_026226 MOD_027 IEC-MODE_027227 MOD_028 IEC-MODE_028228 MOD_029 IEC-MODE_029229 MOD_030 IEC-MODE_030230 MOD_031 IEC-MODE_031231 MOD_032 IEC-MODE_032232 MOD_033 IEC-MODE_033233 MOD_034 IEC-MODE_034234 MOD_035 IEC-MODE_035235 MOD_036 IEC-MODE_036236 MOD_037 IEC-MODE_037237 MOD_038 IEC-MODE_038238 MOD_039 IEC-MODE_039239 MOD_040 IEC-MODE_040240 MOD_041 IEC-MODE_041241 MOD_042 IEC-MODE_042242 MOD_043 IEC-MODE_043243 MOD_044 IEC-MODE_044244 MOD_045 IEC-MODE_045245 MOD_046 IEC-MODE_046246 MOD_047 IEC-MODE_047247 MOD_048 IEC-MODE_048248 MOD_049 IEC-MODE_049249 MOD_050 IEC-MODE_050250 MOD_051 IEC-MODE_051

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS251 MOD_052 IEC-MODE_052252 MOD_053 IEC-MODE_053253 MOD_054 IEC-MODE_054254 MOD_055 IEC-MODE_055255 MOD_056 IEC-MODE_056256 MOD_057 IEC-MODE_057257 MOD_058 IEC-MODE_058258 MOD_059 IEC-MODE_059259 MOD_060 IEC-MODE_060260 MOD_061 IEC-MODE_061261 MOD_062 IEC-MODE_062262 MOD_063 IEC-MODE_063263 MOD_064 IEC-MODE_064264 MOD_065 IEC-MODE_065265 MOD_066 IEC-MODE_066266 MOD_067 IEC-MODE_067267 MOD_068 IEC-MODE_068268 MOD_069 IEC-MODE_069269 MOD_070 IEC-MODE_070270 MOD_071 IEC-MODE_071271 MOD_072 IEC-MODE_072272 MOD_073 IEC-MODE_073273 MOD_074 IEC-MODE_074274 MOD_075 IEC-MODE_075275 MOD_076 IEC-MODE_076276 MOD_077 IEC-MODE_077277 MOD_078 IEC-MODE_078278 MOD_079 IEC-MODE_079279 MOD_080 IEC-MODE_080280 MOD_081 IEC-MODE_081281 MOD_082 IEC-MODE_082282 MOD_083 IEC-MODE_083283 MOD_084 IEC-MODE_084284 MOD_085 IEC-MODE_085285 MOD_086 IEC-MODE_086286 MOD_087 IEC-MODE_087287 MOD_088 IEC-MODE_088288 MOD_089 IEC-MODE_089289 MOD_090 IEC-MODE_090290 MOD_091 IEC-MODE_091291 MOD_092 IEC-MODE_092292 MOD_093 IEC-MODE_093293 MOD_094 IEC-MODE_094294 MOD_095 IEC-MODE_095295 MOD_096 IEC-MODE_096296 MOD_097 IEC-MODE_097297 MOD_098 IEC-MODE_098298 MOD_099 IEC-MODE_099299 MOD_100 IEC-MODE_100300 BEH_001 IEC-Behavier_001

⎯ 166 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS301 BEH_002 IEC-Behavier_002302 BEH_003 IEC-Behavier_003303 BEH_004 IEC-Behavier_004304 BEH_005 IEC-Behavier_005305 BEH_006 IEC-Behavier_006306 BEH_007 IEC-Behavier_007307 BEH_008 IEC-Behavier_008308 BEH_009 IEC-Behavier_009309 BEH_010 IEC-Behavier_010310 BEH_011 IEC-Behavier_011311 BEH_012 IEC-Behavier_012312 BEH_013 IEC-Behavier_013313 BEH_014 IEC-Behavier_014314 BEH_015 IEC-Behavier_015315 BEH_016 IEC-Behavier_016316 BEH_017 IEC-Behavier_017317 BEH_018 IEC-Behavier_018318 BEH_019 IEC-Behavier_019319 BEH_020 IEC-Behavier_020320 BEH_021 IEC-Behavier_021321 BEH_022 IEC-Behavier_022322 BEH_023 IEC-Behavier_023323 BEH_024 IEC-Behavier_024324 BEH_025 IEC-Behavier_025325 BEH_026 IEC-Behavier_026326 BEH_027 IEC-Behavier_027327 BEH_028 IEC-Behavier_028328 BEH_029 IEC-Behavier_029329 BEH_030 IEC-Behavier_030330 BEH_031 IEC-Behavier_031331 BEH_032 IEC-Behavier_032332 BEH_033 IEC-Behavier_033333 BEH_034 IEC-Behavier_034334 BEH_035 IEC-Behavier_035335 BEH_036 IEC-Behavier_036336 BEH_037 IEC-Behavier_037337 BEH_038 IEC-Behavier_038338 BEH_039 IEC-Behavier_039339 BEH_040 IEC-Behavier_040340 BEH_041 IEC-Behavier_041341 BEH_042 IEC-Behavier_042342 BEH_043 IEC-Behavier_043343 BEH_044 IEC-Behavier_044344 BEH_045 IEC-Behavier_045345 BEH_046 IEC-Behavier_046346 BEH_047 IEC-Behavier_047347 BEH_048 IEC-Behavier_048348 BEH_049 IEC-Behavier_049349 BEH_050 IEC-Behavier_050350 BEH_051 IEC-Behavier_051

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS351 BEH_052 IEC-Behavier_052352 BEH_053 IEC-Behavier_053353 BEH_054 IEC-Behavier_054354 BEH_055 IEC-Behavier_055355 BEH_056 IEC-Behavier_056356 BEH_057 IEC-Behavier_057357 BEH_058 IEC-Behavier_058358 BEH_059 IEC-Behavier_059359 BEH_060 IEC-Behavier_060360 BEH_061 IEC-Behavier_061361 BEH_062 IEC-Behavier_062362 BEH_063 IEC-Behavier_063363 BEH_064 IEC-Behavier_064364 BEH_065 IEC-Behavier_065365 BEH_066 IEC-Behavier_066366 BEH_067 IEC-Behavier_067367 BEH_068 IEC-Behavier_068368 BEH_069 IEC-Behavier_069369 BEH_070 IEC-Behavier_070370 BEH_071 IEC-Behavier_071371 BEH_072 IEC-Behavier_072372 BEH_073 IEC-Behavier_073373 BEH_074 IEC-Behavier_074374 BEH_075 IEC-Behavier_075375 BEH_076 IEC-Behavier_076376 BEH_077 IEC-Behavier_077377 BEH_078 IEC-Behavier_078378 BEH_079 IEC-Behavier_079379 BEH_080 IEC-Behavier_080380 BEH_081 IEC-Behavier_081381 BEH_082 IEC-Behavier_082382 BEH_083 IEC-Behavier_083383 BEH_084 IEC-Behavier_084384 BEH_085 IEC-Behavier_085385 BEH_086 IEC-Behavier_086386 BEH_087 IEC-Behavier_087387 BEH_088 IEC-Behavier_088388 BEH_089 IEC-Behavier_089389 BEH_090 IEC-Behavier_090390 BEH_091 IEC-Behavier_091391 BEH_092 IEC-Behavier_092392 BEH_093 IEC-Behavier_093393 BEH_094 IEC-Behavier_094394 BEH_095 IEC-Behavier_095395 BEH_096 IEC-Behavier_096396 BEH_097 IEC-Behavier_097397 BEH_098 IEC-Behavier_098398 BEH_099 IEC-Behavier_099399 BEH_100 IEC-Behavier_100400 Const0 Const0

⎯ 167 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS401 Const1 Const1402 Const2 Const2403 Const3 Const3404 Const4 Const4405 Const5 Const5406407408409410411412413414415416417418419420421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435436437438439440441442443444445446447448449450

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS451452453454455456457458459460461462463464465466467468469470471472473474475476477478479480481482483484485486487488489490491492493494495496497498499

⎯ 168 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Control Table

NO SIGNAL NAME CONTENTS0 LEDRST_SIG LED Reset1 LEDRST_ORCAT Control - LED Reset Originator category2 LEDRST_ORID Control - LED Reset Originator category3 LEDRST_ORCAT_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category4 LEDRST_ORID_ST Status - LED Rst Originator category5 RESERVE Reserve6 RESERVE Reserve7 RESERVE Reserve8 RESERVE Reserve9 RESERVE Reserve

10 MOD_CHECK MOD_CHECK11 MOD_CTLNUM MOD_CTLNUM12 MOD_CTLVAL MOD_CTLVAL13 MOD_ORCAT MOD_ORCAT14 MOD_ORIDENT MOD_ORIDENT15 MOD_TEST MOD_TEST16 MOD_CTLMDL MOD_CTLMDL17 MOD_ST_ORCAT MOD_ST_ORCAT18 MOD_ST_ORIDENT MOD_ST_ORIDENT19 MOD_SELECT MOD_SELECT20 MOD_SBOTIMEOUT MOD_SBOTIMEOUT21 MOD_SBOCLASS MOD_SBOCLASS

⎯ 169 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix B

Event Record Items

⎯ 170 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default setting

No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type

210D 410D1 EV1 0 - 3071 -- Event record signal 768 BI1 command x On/Off2 EV2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 769 BI2 command x On/Off3 EV3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 770 BI3 command x On/Off4 EV4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 771 BI4 command x On/Off5 EV5 0 - 3071 -- ditto 772 BI5 command x On/Off6 EV6 0 - 3071 -- ditto 773 BI6 command x On/Off7 EV7 0 - 3071 -- ditto 774 BI7 command x On/Off8 EV8 0 - 3071 -- ditto 775 BI8 command x On/Off9 EV9 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1639 Ind reset x On/Off10 EV10 0 - 3071 -- ditto 371 GEN trip x On/Off11 EV11 0 - 3071 -- ditto 380 GEN alarm x On/Off12 EV12 0 - 3071 -- ditto 355 FRQ trip x On/Off13 EV13 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off14 EV14 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off15 EV15 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off16 EV16 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off17 EV17 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off18 EV18 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off19 EV19 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off20 EV20 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off21 EV21 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off22 EV22 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off23 EV23 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off24 EV24 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1251 Relay fail x On/Off25 EV25 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off26 EV26 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1268 V0 err x On/Off27 EV27 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1269 V2 err x On/Off28 EV28 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1270 TCSV x On/Off29 EV29 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off30 EV30 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off31 EV31 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off32 EV32 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off33 EV33 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off34 EV34 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off35 EV35 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off36 EV36 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off37 EV37 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off38 EV38 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off39 EV39 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off40 EV40 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off41 EV41 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off42 EV42 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off43 EV43 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off44 EV44 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off45 EV45 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off46 EV46 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off47 EV47 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off48 EV48 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off49 EV49 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1258 Ry fail-A x On/Off50 EV50 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1438 Data lost x On/Off51 EV51 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off52 EV52 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off53 EV53 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off54 EV54 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off55 EV55 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off56 EV56 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off57 EV57 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off58 EV58 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off59 EV59 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off60 EV60 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off61 EV61 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off62 EV62 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off63 EV63 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off64 EV64 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off

Event record

⎯ 171 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default setting

No. Name Range Unit Contents Signal No. Signal name Model Type

210D 410D65 EV65 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off66 EV66 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off67 EV67 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off68 EV68 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off69 EV69 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off70 EV70 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off71 EV71 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off72 EV72 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off73 EV73 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off74 EV74 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off75 EV75 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off76 EV76 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off77 EV77 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off78 EV78 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off79 EV79 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off80 EV80 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off81 EV81 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off82 EV82 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off83 EV83 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off84 EV84 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off85 EV85 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off86 EV86 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off87 EV87 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off88 EV88 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off89 EV89 0 - 3071 -- ditto 471 BO1 operate x On/Off90 EV90 0 - 3071 -- ditto 472 BO2 operate x On/Off91 EV91 0 - 3071 -- ditto 473 BO3 operate x On/Off92 EV92 0 - 3071 -- ditto 474 BO4 operate x On/Off93 EV93 0 - 3071 -- ditto 475 BO5 operate x On/Off94 EV94 0 - 3071 -- ditto 476 BO6 operate x On/Off95 EV95 0 - 3071 -- ditto 477 BO7 operate x On/Off96 EV96 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off97 EV97 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off98 EV98 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off99 EV99 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off100 EV100 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On/Off101 EV101 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2640 SET.GROUP1 x On102 EV102 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2641 SET.GROUP2 x On103 EV103 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2642 SET.GROUP3 x On104 EV104 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2643 SET.GROUP4 x On105 EV105 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2644 SET.GROUP5 x On106 EV106 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2645 SET.GROUP6 x On107 EV107 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2646 SET.GROUP7 x On108 EV108 0 - 3071 -- ditto 2647 SET.GROUP8 x On109 EV109 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1448 Sys. change x On110 EV110 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1449 Rly. change x On111 EV111 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1450 Grp. change x On112 EV112 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On113 EV113 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1272 TC alarm x On114 EV114 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On115 EV115 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On116 EV116 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On117 EV117 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On118 EV118 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On119 EV119 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1445 PLC data CHG x On120 EV120 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On121 EV121 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1409 LED RST x On122 EV122 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1435 F.record_CLR x On123 EV123 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1436 E.record_CLR x On124 EV124 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1437 D.record_CLR x On125 EV125 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1439 TP_COUNT_CLR x On126 EV126 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On127 EV127 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0 On128 EV128 0 - 3071 -- ditto 1442 DEMAND_CLR x On

Event record

⎯ 172 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 173 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix C

Binary Output Default Setting List

⎯ 174 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default Setting210 410

Setting Signal Name Setting Signal NameLogic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIPIn #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIPIn #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 371 GEN.TRIP 371 GEN.TRIPIn #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 122 UV1_TRIP 122 UV1_TRIPIn #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --Logic OR - AND － Logic gate OR -- OR --Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl -- Dl --In #1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 143 ZOV1_TRIP 143 ZOV1_TRIPIn #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0In #6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.20 -- 0.20 --

Range Unit Contents

BO5

BO6

BO7

SettingDeviceName

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

⎯ 175 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix D

Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation

⎯ 176 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

a-1 b-1

Status Set. (view) Set. (change) Test

MENU Record

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/4 F.record #1 16/Jul/2002

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/1 Record F. record

E. record D. record Counter

/2 F.record Display

Clear

/3 F.record

#1 16/Jul/2002 18:13:57.031

/3 D.record

#1 16/Jul/2002 18:13:57.401

/2 E.record Display

Clear

/3 E.record

16/Jul/2002 OV1 trip On

/2 D.record Display

Clear

Refer to Section 4.2.3.1.

Refer to Section 4.2.3.2.

Refer to Section 4.2.3.3.

⎯ 177 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

a-1

Clear Trips? END=Y CANCEL=N

/3 Counter Trips ******

TripsA ****** TripsB ****** TripsC ******

Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.

/2 Counter Display

Clear Trips Clear Trips A Clear Trips B Clear Trips C

Clear Trips A? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips B? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips C? END=Y CANCEL=N

a-1 b-1

⎯ 178 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

a-1, b-1

a-1

/1 Status Metering

Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast

/1 Set. (view) Version

Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

Refer to Section 4.2.4.

/2 Version Relay type

Serial No. Software

/2 Description Plant name

Description

Refer to Section 4.2.5

GSPDM1-03-*

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗

/2 Comms Addr./Param.

Switch /3 Switch

GRD130-210D-10 -A0

/3 Addr./Param. IEC 2

/2 12/Nov/2002 22:56:19 [L]

/2 Binary I/O IP [0000 0000]

/2 Ry element OV#1[000000000]

/2 Time sync. *BI: Act.

/2 LCD contrast

/2 Metering Metering

Demand

/3 Metering Va **.** kV

/3 Demand Vamax **.** kV

⎯ 179 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4 a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/2 Act. gp. =* Common

Group1 : Group8

/3 Group1 Parameter

Trip

/3 Common

/2 Record E.record D.record Counter

/2 Status Metering

/3 Time sync.

/3 Metering

Time sync. Time zone

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set TCALM 10000

/3 Counter Scheme sw

Alarm set

/3 E.record Signal No.

Event name

/4 Time/starter Time 2.0s

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Binary sig. SIG1 ∗∗∗

/3 D.record Time/starter

Scheme sw Binary sig. Signal name

/4 Signal No. BITRN 100

/4 Event name

/4 Signal name

/3 Time zone GMT +9hrs

⎯ 180 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

/3 Group8 Parameter

/3 Group2 Parameter

a-1 b-1

/6 OV

/4 Trip Scheme sw

Prot. element

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/5 Scheme sw OV

UV ZOV NOV FRQ SYN

/5 Prot.element OV

UV ZOV NOV FRQ SYN

/6 UV

/6 ZOV

/6 NOV

/6 OV

/6 UV

/6 ZOV

/6 NOV

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗

/5 VT ratio PVT 100

/4 Parameter Line name

VT ratio

VESVT 100

/6 FRQ

/6 SYN

/6 FRQ

/6 SYN

/2 Binary I/P Timers

Functions

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

⎯ 181 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

: Confirmation trap

: Password trap

Password [_ ] 1234567890←

Change settings?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/3 LED

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-2

/1 Set.(change) Password

Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

/2 LED LED

Virtual LED /3 Virtual LED IND1

IND2

/4 IND1 BIT1 I,O

/4 IND2 BIT1 I,O

/2 Binary O/P BO1 AND, D

1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005 BO2 AND, DL ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗ : BO7 OR, L ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗ BO1TBO 0.20s : BO7TBO 0.20s

Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.

/2 Password Setting

Test

_ ABCDEFG

_ ABCDEFG

/2 Description Plant name

Description Alarm1 Text : Alarm4 Text

⎯ 182 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

a-1 b-2

/3 Metering

/3 Time sync.

/2 Status Metering

Time sync.

/2 Protection Change act. gp.

Change set. Copy gp.

/3 Change act. gp.

/3 Act gp.=1 Common

Group1 :

Group8

Refer to Section 4.2.6.7.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.6.

/4 Time/starter

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record E.record

D.record Counter

/3 D.record Time/starter

Scheme sw Binary sig.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.5.

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set

/3 Counter Scheme sw

Alarm set

/4 Binary sig.

/3 E.record

BITRN 100 _

:

/3 Addr./Param.

/3 Switch

/2 Comms Addr./Param.

Switch

⎯ 183 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4 a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

_ ABCDEFG

/4 Group1 Parameter

Trip

/5 Parameter Line name

VT ratio

/4 Group8 Parameter

/4 Group2 Parameter

/6 VT ratio

/5 Trip Scheme sw

Prot.element

/7 ZOV

/6 Scheme sw OV

UV ZOV NOV FRQ SYN

/6 Prot.element OV

UV ZOV NOV FRQ SYN

/7 NOV

/7 FRQ

/7 SYN

/7 OV

/7 UV

/7 ZOV

/7 NOV

a-1, b-2 c-2

/4 Common

/7 OV

/7 UV

/7 FRQ

/7 SYN

⎯ 184 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

/3 Copy A to B A _

B _

Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

/4 Logic/Reset

/4 Functions

/3 BO1 Logic/Reset

Functions

/2 Binary O/P BO1

BO7

/3 BO7 Logic/Reset

Functions

Refer to Section 4.2.6.10.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.9.

/2 Binary I/P BI1

BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8

/3 BI1 Timers

Functions

/3 BI8 Timers

Functions

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

a-1 b-2 c-2

a-1 c-3

/5 Logic/Reset

/5 Functions

/4 LED1 Logic/Reset

Functions

/3 LED LED1

LED6

/4 LED6 Logic/Reset

Functions

/2 LED LED

Virtual LED

⎯ 185 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

a-1 c-3

/3 Virtual LED IND1

IND2

/5 Reset

/5 Functions

/4 IND1 Reset

Functions

/4 IND2 Reset

Functions

Operate? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/1 Test Switch

Binary O/P Logic circuit

/2 Switch

A.M.F. 1 _ Off/On UVTST 0 Off/On IECTST 0 Off/On

/2 Binary O/P

BO1 0 _ Disable/Enable FAIL 0 Disable/Enable

Refer to Section 4.2.7.

/2 Logic circuit

TermA 1 _ TermB 1001 _

: Password trap

Password [_ ] 1234567890←

⎯ 186 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION

NORMAL (DISPLAY OFF)

VIEW

METERING 1 ( DISPLAY ON )

VIEW RESET

METERING 5 ( DISPLAY ON )

VIEW

LATEST FAULT * ( DISPLAY ON )

RESET

VIEW

AUTO SUPERVISON * ( DISPLAY ON )

RESET

VIEW RESET

TRIP OUTPUT ISSUED !

TRIP ( LED ON )

MANUAL MODE

AUTO- MODE 1

RELAY FAILED !

ALARM ( LED ON )

AUTO- MODE 2

PRESS ANY BUTTON EXCEPT FOR "VIEW" AND "RESET"

MENU ( DISPLAY ON )

1=RECORD

1=FAULT RECORD

2=EVENT RECORD

2=STATUS

1=METERING

2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT

3=RELAY ELELMENT

4=TIME SYNC SOURCE

5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

3=SETTING (VIEW)

1=RELAY VERSION

2=DESCRIPTION

3=COMMUNICATION

4=RECORD

5=STATUS

6=PROTECTION

7=BINARY INPUT

8=BINARY OUTPUT

9=LED

5=TEST

1=SWITCH

2=BINARY OUTPUT

1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED ITEMS 2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN

*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA IS STORED

4=SETTING (CHANGE)

3=DISTURBANCE RECORD

Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu

4=COUNTER

⎯ 187 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix E

Case Outline

⎯ 188 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Case Outline

185.2 32 15.6

Side view 104

2 5

8

IN SERVICE T RIP ALARM

VIEW

RESET

Front view

END

CELCAN

ENTER

2 4

9

Panel cut-out

56 102

4 holes-φ5.5

2 3

9

4 holes-φ4.5

Rear view for RS485 + 100BASE-TX

Terminal block

TB3A1 B1

A18 B18

TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal (M3.5 Ring)

T1: RJ45

OPT: ST connector

F1: SC connector

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB1

TB2 A1 B1

A10 B10

7 8

A B 0V

Rear view for Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX

Terminal Application TB3: A1 – A3 RS485 I/F TB3: B1 – B2 IRIG-B OPT Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103 T1 100BASE-TX F1 100BASE-FX

TB3

E

TB2

TB1

T1

TB3

E

TB1

TB2

OPT RT

R F1

T

⎯ 189 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix F

Typical External Connection

⎯ 190 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Typical External Connection

GRD130 - 210 (1PN setting)

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6

B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10

B10BO4

A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2-A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

4 3 2

FRAME EARTH

VY

VN

TB1-1

A B C

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 191 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Typical External Connection

GRD130 - 210 (1PP setting)

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6

B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10

B10BO4

A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2- A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

4 3 2

FRAME EARTH

VΔ

VN

TB1-1

A B C

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10

B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 192 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GRD130 - 210 (2PP setting)

Typical External Connection

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10B10

BO4A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2-A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

4 3 2

FRAME EARTH

VAB

VBC

TB1-1

A B C

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 193 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GRD130 - 410 (3PN setting)

Typical External Connection

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10B10

BO4A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2-A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

A B C

4 3 2

6 5

FRAME EARTH

8 7

VC

TB1-1

VA

VB

VN

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 194 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Typical External Connection

GRD130 - 410 (3PP setting)

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6

B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10

B10BO4

A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2-A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

4 3 2

6 5

FRAME EARTH

8 7

VCA

TB1-1

VAB

VBC

VN

A B C

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 195 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GRD130 - 410 (2PP setting)

Typical External Connection

A4BO1

A5B5A7B7

BO2A6B6B8A8

BO3A9B9

A10B10

BO4A11B11A13B13

BO5A12B12

A14B14

BO6A15B15

A16B16BO7

B17

A17FAILA18B18

TB3-B4

(P)

B1 BI1

B2 BI2

B3 BI3

A2

A3

B4 BI4A4

B5 BI5A5

B6 BI6A6

B7 BI7A7

B8 BI8A8

TB2-A1

(N)

BI1 COMMAND

BI2 COMMAND

BI3 COMMAND

BI4 COMMAND

BI5 COMMAND

BI6 COMMAND

BI7 COMMAND

BI8 COMMAND

4 3 2

6 5

FRAME EARTH

8 7

VCA

TB1-1

VAB

VBC

VN

A B C

DD FAIL.

(-) (+)

+5Vdc

0V

DC SUPPLY DC-DC

RELAY FAIL.≥1

TB2- A9

B9

CASE EARTHE

A10

B10

FRAME EARTH(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.

TB3-A2

COM-B

COM-A

A1

A3 COM-0V

RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option) TX

Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)

OPT

FX

TR

IRIG-B TB3-B2

B1

⎯ 196 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 197 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix G

Relay Setting Sheet 1. Relay Identification

2. Line parameter

3. Contacts setting

4. Relay setting sheet

⎯ 198 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number Frequency AC voltage DC supply voltage Password Active setting group

2. Line parameter

VT ratio PVT: RVT:

3. Contacts setting

TB3 Terminal A5(B5)-B4, A4 Terminal A6(B6)-A7, B7 Terminal A9(B9)-B8, A8 Terminal A11(B11)-A10, B10 Terminal A12(B12)-A13, B13 Terminal A15(B15)-A14, B14 Terminal B16-A16

⎯ 199 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4. Relay setting sheet Default Setting of Relay Series

Model210 410

1 Active group 1 - 8 － Active setting group 11PP - 1PN - 2PP － Application setting of VT(200) 1PP --3PN - 3PP - 2PP Application setting of VT(400) -- 3PN

3 APPLVES Off - Ve - Vs － Application setting of VT-Ves Ve4 V0SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － ditto -- ALM5 V2SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － ditto Off ALM6 AOLED Off - On － TRIP LED lighting control at alarm output On7 Line name Specified by user － Line name no-name8 PVT 1 - 20000 － Phase VT ratio 1009 VESVT 1 - 20000 － Ve's VT ratio 100

10 OV OV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV1 Enable Off11 OV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV2 Enable Off12 OV3EN Off - On － OV3 Enable Off13 OV4EN Off - On － OV4 Enable Off14 UV UV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV1 Enable DT15 UV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV2 Enable Off16 UV3EN Off - On － UV3 Enable Off17 UV4EN Off - On － UV4 Enable Off18 VBLKEN Off - On － UV Block Enable Off19 ZOV ZOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV1 Enable DT20 ZOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV2 Enable Off21 NOV NOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV1 Enable Off22 NOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV2 Enable Off23 FRQ FRQ1EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ1 Enable Off24 FRQ2EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ2 Enable Off25 FRQ3EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ3 Enable Off26 FRQ4EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ4 Enable Off27 DFRQ DFRQ1EN Off - R - D － DFRQ1 Enable Off28 DFRQ2EN Off - R - D － DFRQ2 Enable Off29 DFRQ3EN Off - R - D － DFRQ3 Enable Off30 DFRQ4EN Off - R - D － DFRQ4 Enable Off31 OV OV1 10.0 - 200.0 V OV1 Threshold setting 120.032 TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s OV1 Definite time setting 1.0033 TOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV1 Time multiplier setting 1.0034 TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay 0.035 OV1DPR 10 - 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 9536 OV2 10.0 - 200.0 V OV2 Threshold setting 140.037 TOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s OV2 Definite time setting 1.0038 TOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV2 Time multiplier setting 1.0039 TOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay 0.040 OV2DPR 10 - 98 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 9541 OV3 10.0 - 200.0 V OV3 Threshold setting 140.042 TOV3 0.00 - 300.00 s OV3 Definite time setting 1.0043 OV3DPR 10 - 98 % OV3 DO/PU ratio 9544 OV4 10.0 - 200.0 V OV4 Threshold setting 140.045 TOV4 0.00 - 300.00 s OV4 Definite time setting 1.0046 OV4DPR 10 - 98 % OV4 DO/PU ratio 9547 OV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 1.0048 OV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0049 OV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00050 OV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 1.0051 OV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0052 OV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00053 UV UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 Threshold setting 60.054 TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s UV1 Definite time setting 1.0055 TUV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV1 Time multiplier setting 1.0056 TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay 0.057 UV2 5.0 - 130.0 V UV2 Threshold setting 40.058 TUV2 0.00 - 300.00 s UV2 Definite time setting 1.0059 TUV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV2 Time multiplier setting 1.0060 TUV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay 0.061 UV3 5.0 - 130.0 V UV3 Threshold setting 40.062 TUV3 0.00 - 300.00 s UV3 Definite time setting 1.0063 UV4 5.0 - 130.0 V UV4 Threshold setting 40.064 TUV4 0.00 - 300.00 s UV4 Definite time setting 1.0065 VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UV Blocking threshold 10.066 UV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 1.0067 UV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0068 UV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00069 UV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 1.0070 UV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0071 UV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000

User settingContents

2 APPL

Units№ Setting Device Name Range

⎯ 200 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default Setting of Relay SeriesModel

210 41072 ZOV ZOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV1 Threshold setting 20.073 TZOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV1 Definite time setting 1.0074 TZOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV1 Time multiplier setting 1.0075 TZOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.076 ZOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV2 Threshold setting 40.077 TZOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV2 Definite time setting 1.0078 TZOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 1.0079 TZOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.080 ZOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1 1.0081 ZOV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0082 ZOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00083 ZOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2 1.0084 ZOV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0085 ZOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00086 NOV NOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV1 Threshold setting 20.087 TNOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV1 Definite time setting 1.0088 TNOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV1 Time multiplier setting 1.0089 TNOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.090 NOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV2 Threshold setting 40.091 TNOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV2 Definite time setting 1.0092 TNOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV2 Time multiplier setting 1.0093 TNOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.094 NOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1 1.0095 NOV1-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0096 NOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.00097 NOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2 1.0098 NOV2-α 0.00 - 5.00 － ditto 1.0099 NOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000

100 FRQ FRQ1 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ1 Threshold setting -1.00101 TFRQ1 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ1 Definite time setting 1.00102 FRQ2 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ2 Threshold setting -1.00103 TFRQ2 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ2 Definite time setting 1.00104 FRQ3 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ3 Threshold setting -1.00105 TFRQ3 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ3 Definite time setting 1.00106 FRQ4 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ4 Threshold setting -1.00107 TFRQ4 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ4 Definite time setting 1.00108 FVBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V UV Blocking threshold 40.0109 DFRQ DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ1 Threshold setting. 0.5110 DFRQ2 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ2 Threshold setting. 0.5111 DFRQ3 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ3 Threshold setting. 0.5112 DFRQ4 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ4 Threshold setting. 0.5113 SYN VCHK Off - LD - DL - DD - S － Autoreclosing volatge check Off114 DfEN Off - On － Frequency difference checking enable Off115 VTPHSEL A - B - C － VT phase selection A116 VT-RATE PH-G - PH-PH － VT rating PH-G117 VES-RATE PH-G - PH-PH － VES rating PH-G118 3PH-VT Bus - Line － 3ph. VT location Line119 OVB 10 - 150 V OV element of bus-voltage check 51120 UVB 10 - 150 V UV element of bus-voltage check 13121 OVL 10 - 150 V OV element of line-voltage check 51122 UVL 10 - 150 V UV element of line-voltage check 13123 SYNUV 10 - 150 V UV element of Synchro. check 83124 SYNOV 10 - 150 V OV element of Synchro. check 51125 SYNDV 0 - 150 V Voltage difference for SYN 150126 SYNθ 5 - 75 deg Synchro. check (ph. diff.) 30127 SYNDf 0.01 - 2.00 Hz Frequency difference checking for SYN 1.00128 TSYN 0.01 - 10.00 s Synchronism check timer (Live-bus & Live-line) 1.00129 TLBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Live-bus & Dead-line) 0.05130 TDBLL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Live-line) 0.05131 TDBDL 0.01 - 10.00 s Voltage check timer (Dead-bus & Dead-line) 0.05132 BI1 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00133 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00134 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm135 BI2 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00136 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00137 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm138 BI3 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00139 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00140 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm141 BI4 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00142 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00143 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm

User settingContentsUnits№ Setting Device Name Range

⎯ 201 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default Setting of Relay SeriesModel

210 410144 BI5 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00145 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00146 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm147 BI6 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00148 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00149 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm150 BI7 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00151 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00152 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm153 BI8 PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00154 DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00155 SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Sense Norm156 LED1 Logic OR - AND － LED1 Logic Gate Type OR157 Reset Inst - Latch － LED1 Reset operation Inst158 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED1 Functions 0159 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0160 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0161 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0162 LED2 Logic OR - AND － LED2 Logic Gate Type OR163 Reset Inst - Latch － LED2 Reset operation Inst164 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED2 Functions 0165 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0166 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0167 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0168 LED3 Logic OR - AND － LED3 Logic Gate Type OR169 Reset Inst - Latch － LED3 Reset operation Inst170 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED3 Functions 0171 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0172 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0173 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0174 LED4 Logic OR - AND － LED4 Logic Gate Type OR175 Reset Inst - Latch － LED4 Reset operation Inst176 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED4 Functions 0177 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0178 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0179 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0180 LED5 Logic OR - AND － LED5 Logic Gate Type OR181 Reset Inst - Latch － LED5 Reset operation Inst182 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED5 Functions 0183 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0184 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0185 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0186 LED6 Logic OR - AND － LED6 Logic Gate Type OR187 Reset Inst - Latch － LED6 Reset operation Inst188 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED6 Functions 0189 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0190 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0191 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0192 IND1 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED1 Reset operation Inst193 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED1 Functions 0194 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0195 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0196 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0197 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0198 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0199 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0200 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0201 IND2 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED2 Reset operation Inst202 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED2 Functions 0203 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0204 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0205 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0206 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0207 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0208 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0209 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0210 Plant name Specified by user － Plant name no-name211 Description ditto － Memorandum for user no-data212 Alarm1 Text Specified by user － Alarm1 Text ALARM1213 Alarm2 Text Specified by user － Alarm2 Text ALARM2214 Alarm3 Text Specified by user － Alarm3 Text ALARM3215 Alarm4 Text Specified by user － Alarm4 Text ALARM4

Units№ Setting Device Name Range User settingContents

⎯ 202 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default Setting of Relay SeriesModel

210 410216 IEC 0 - 254 － Station address for IEC103 2217 SYADJ -9999 - 9999 ms Time sync. Compensation 0218 IP1-1 0 - 254 － 192219 IP1-2 0 - 254 － 168220 IP1-3 0 - 254 － 19221 IP1-4 0 - 254 － 172222 SM1-1 0 - 255 － 255223 SM1-2 0 - 255 － 255224 SM1-3 0 - 255 － 255225 SM1-4 0 - 255 － 0226 GW1-1 0 - 254 － 192227 GW1-2 0 - 254 － 168228 GW1-3 0 - 254 － 19229 GW1-4 0 - 254 － 1230 IP2-1 0 - 254 － IP Address of CH#2 192231 IP2-2 0 - 254 － 168232 IP2-3 0 - 254 － 19233 IP2-4 0 - 254 － 173234 SM2-1 0 - 255 － Subnet Mask of CH#2 255235 SM2-2 0 - 255 － 255236 SM2-3 0 - 255 － 255237 SM2-4 0 - 255 － 0238 GW2-1 0 - 254 － Gateway Address of CH#2 192239 GW2-2 0 - 254 － 168240 GW2-3 0 - 254 － 19241 GW2-4 0 - 254 － 1242 SI1-1 0 - 254 － SNTP Server1 Address 0243 SI1-2 0 - 254 － 0244 SI1-3 0 - 254 － 0245 SI1-4 0 - 254 － 0246 SI2-1 0 - 254 － SNTP Server2 Address 0247 SI2-2 0 - 254 － 0248 SI2-3 0 - 254 － 0249 SI2-4 0 - 254 － 0250 SI3-1 0 - 254 － SNTP Server3 Address 0251 SI3-2 0 - 254 － 0252 SI3-3 0 - 254 － 0253 SI3-4 0 - 254 － 0254 SI4-1 0 - 254 － SNTP Server4 Address 0255 SI4-2 0 - 254 － 0256 SI4-3 0 - 254 － 0257 SI4-4 0 - 254 － 0258 SMODE 0 - 1 － 0259 DEADT 1 - 120 min TCP KeepAlive Time 120260 GOINT 1 - 60 s 60261 PG1-1 0 - 254 － Ping check addrs port#1 0262 PG1-2 0 - 254 － 0263 PG1-3 0 - 254 － 0264 PG1-4 0 - 254 － 0265 PG2-1 0 - 254 － Ping check addrs port#2 0266 PG2-2 0 - 254 － 0267 PG2-3 0 - 254 － 0268 PG2-4 0 - 254 － 0269 232C 9.6 - 19.2 - 57.6 － RS-232C baud rate 9.6270 IECBR 9.6 - 19.2 － IEC103 baud rate 19.2271 IECBLK Normal - Blocked － Monitor direction blocked Normal272 850BLK Normal - Blocked － IEC61850 Block Normal273 850AUT Off - On － IEC61850 Authorize Off274 TSTMOD Off - On － IEC61850 Test mode Off275 GSECHK Off - On － GOOSE receive check Off276 PINGCHK Off - On － Ping check Off277 BITRN 0 - 128 － Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events 100278 Time 0.1 - 5.0 s Disturbance record 2.0279 OV 10.0 - 200.0 V ditto 120.0280 UV 1.0 - 130.0 V ditto 60.0281 ZOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0282 NOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0283 TRIP Off - On － Disturbance record trigger use or not On284 OV Off - On － ditto On285 UV Off - On － ditto On286 ZOV Off - On － ditto On287 NOV Off - On － ditto On

Units№ Setting Device Name Range

CH1 IP address

CH1 Subnet mask

CH1 Gateway

User settingContents

⎯ 203 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Default Setting of Relay SeriesModel

210 410288 TCSPEN Off - On － Trip Circuit Supervision Enable Off289 TCAEN Off - On － Trip CounterAlarm Enable Off290 TCALM 1 - 10000 － Trip Count Alarm Threshold 10000291 Display Prim. - Second. － Metering Prim.292 Time sync Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN － Time sync. Of293 GMT -12 - +12 hrs Time 0294 GMTm -59 - +59 min Time 0

User settingContentsUnits№ Setting Device NameRange

⎯ 204 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

5. PLC default setting

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

15361537153815391540154115421543154415451546154715481549155015511552155315541555155615571558155915601561156215631564156515661567156815691570157115721573157415751576 DFRQ1_BLOCK1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK15801581158215831584 OV1_BLOCK1585 OV2_BLOCK1586 OV3_BLOCK1587 OV4_BLOCK1588 UV1_BLOCK1589 UV2_BLOCK1590 UV3_BLOCK1591 UV4_BLOCK1592 ZOV1_BLOCK1593 ZOV2_BLOCK159415951596 NOV1_BLOCK1597 NOV2_BLOCK159815991600 FRQ1_BLOCK1601 FRQ2_BLOCK1602 FRQ3_BLOCK1603 FRQ4_BLOCK1604160516061607160816091610

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 205 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

161116121613161416151616161716181619162016211622162316241625162616271628 EXT_TRIP-A1629 EXT_TRIP-B1630 EXT_TRIP-C1631 EXT_TRIP1632 TC_FAIL1633 CB_N/O_CONT X [769]BI2_COMMAND X1634 CB_N/C_CONT X [1]CONSTANT_1 X16351636163716381639 IND.RESET X [768]BI1_COMMAND X1640164116421643164416451646164716481649165016511652165316541655165616571658165916601661166216631664 TP_COUNT-A1665 TP_COUNT-B1666 TP_COUNT-C1667 TP_COUNT X [371]GEN.TRIP X1668166916701671167216731674167516761677167816791680 FRQ_S1_TRIP1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP16841685

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 206 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

168616871688168916901691169216931694169516961697169816991700170117021703170417051706170717081709171017111712171317141715171617171718171917201721172217231724172517261727172817291730173117321733173417351736173717381739174017411742174317441745174617471748174917501751175217531754175517561757175817591760

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 207 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

176117621763176417651766176717681769177017711772177317741775177617771778177917801781178217831784178517861787178817891790179117921793179417951796179717981799180018011802180318041805180618071808180918101811181218131814181518161817181818191820182118221823182418251826182718281829183018311832183318341835

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 208 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

183618371838183918401841184218431844184518461847184818491850185118521853185418551856185718581859186018611862186318641865186618671868186918701871187218731874187518761877187818791880188118821883188418851886188718881889189018911892189318941895189618971898189919001901190219031904190519061907190819091910

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 209 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

191119121913191419151916191719181919192019211922192319241925192619271928192919301931193219331934193519361937193819391940194119421943194419451946194719481949195019511952195319541955195619571958195919601961196219631964196519661967196819691970197119721973197419751976197719781979198019811982198319841985

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 210 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

198619871988198919901991199219931994199519961997199819992000200120022003200420052006200720082009201020112012201320142015201620172018201920202021202220232024202520262027202820292030203120322033203420352036203720382039204020412042204320442045204620472048204920502051205220532054205520562057205820592060

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 211 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

206120622063206420652066206720682069207020712072207320742075207620772078207920802081208220832084208520862087208820892090209120922093209420952096209720982099210021012102210321042105210621072108210921102111211221132114211521162117211821192120212121222123212421252126212721282129213021312132213321342135

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 212 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

213621372138213921402141214221432144214521462147214821492150215121522153215421552156215721582159216021612162216321642165216621672168216921702171217221732174217521762177217821792180218121822183218421852186218721882189219021912192219321942195219621972198219922002201220222032204220522062207220822092210

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 213 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

221122122213221422152216221722182219222022212222222322242225222622272228222922302231223222332234223522362237223822392240224122422243224422452246224722482249225022512252225322542255225622572258225922602261226222632264226522662267226822692270227122722273227422752276227722782279228022812282228322842285

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 214 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

228622872288228922902291229222932294229522962297229822992300230123022303230423052306230723082309231023112312231323142315231623172318231923202321232223232324232523262327232823292330233123322333233423352336233723382339234023412342234323442345234623472348234923502351235223532354235523562357235823592360

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 215 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

236123622363236423652366236723682369237023712372237323742375237623772378237923802381238223832384238523862387238823892390239123922393239423952396239723982399240024012402240324042405240624072408240924102411241224132414241524162417241824192420242124222423242424252426242724282429243024312432243324342435

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 216 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot Time Value

243624372438243924402441244224432444244524462447244824492450245124522453245424552456245724582459246024612462246324642465246624672468246924702471247224732474247524762477247824792480248124822483248424852486248724882489249024912492249324942495249624972498249925002501250225032504250525062507250825092510

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 217 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot Time Value

25112512251325142515251625172518251925202521252225232524252525262527252825292530253125322533253425352536253725382539254025412542254325442545254625472548254925502551255225532554255525562557255825592560 DISP.ALARM12561 DISP.ALARM22562 DISP.ALARM32563 DISP.ALARM42564256525662567256825692570257125722573257425752576 SYNC_CLOCK257725782579258025812582258325842585

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 218 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

2586258725882589259025912592259325942595259625972598259926002601260226032604260526062607260826092610 ALARM_LED_SET26112612261326142615261626172618261926202621262226232624 F.RECORD12625 F.RECORD22626 F.RECORD32627 F.RECORD426282629263026312632 D.RECORD12633 D.RECORD22634 D.RECORD32635 D.RECORD426362637263826392640 SET.GROUP12641 SET.GROUP22642 SET.GROUP32643 SET.GROUP42644 SET.GROUP52645 SET.GROUP62646 SET.GROUP72647 SET.GROUP8264826492650265126522653265426552656 CON_TPMD12657 CON_TPMD22658 CON_TPMD32659 CON_TPMD42660 CON_TPMD5

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 219 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

2661 CON_TPMD62662 CON_TPMD72663 CON_TPMD8266426652666266726682669267026712672267326742675267626772678267926802681268226832684 ARC_COM_RECV26852686 PROT_COM_RECV26872688 TPLED_RST_RCV26892690269126922693269426952696269726982699270027012702270327042705270627072708270927102711271227132714271527162717271827192720272127222723272427252726272727282729273027312732273327342735

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 220 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

273627372738273927402741274227432744274527462747274827492750275127522753275427552756275727582759276027612762276327642765276627672768276927702771277227732774277527762777277827792780278127822783278427852786278727882789279027912792279327942795279627972798279928002801280228032804280528062807280828092810

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 221 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

281128122813281428152816 TEMP0012817 TEMP0022818 TEMP0032819 TEMP0042820 TEMP0052821 TEMP0062822 TEMP0072823 TEMP0082824 TEMP0092825 TEMP0102826 TEMP0112827 TEMP0122828 TEMP0132829 TEMP0142830 TEMP0152831 TEMP0162832 TEMP0172833 TEMP0182834 TEMP0192835 TEMP0202836 TEMP0212837 TEMP0222838 TEMP0232839 TEMP0242840 TEMP0252841 TEMP0262842 TEMP0272843 TEMP0282844 TEMP0292845 TEMP0302846 TEMP0312847 TEMP0322848 TEMP0332849 TEMP0342850 TEMP0352851 TEMP0362852 TEMP0372853 TEMP0382854 TEMP0392855 TEMP0402856 TEMP0412857 TEMP0422858 TEMP0432859 TEMP0442860 TEMP0452861 TEMP0462862 TEMP0472863 TEMP0482864 TEMP0492865 TEMP0502866 TEMP0512867 TEMP0522868 TEMP0532869 TEMP0542870 TEMP0552871 TEMP0562872 TEMP0572873 TEMP0582874 TEMP0592875 TEMP0602876 TEMP0612877 TEMP0622878 TEMP0632879 TEMP0642880 TEMP0652881 TEMP0662882 TEMP0672883 TEMP0682884 TEMP0692885 TEMP070

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 222 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

2886 TEMP0712887 TEMP0722888 TEMP0732889 TEMP0742890 TEMP0752891 TEMP0762892 TEMP0772893 TEMP0782894 TEMP0792895 TEMP0802896 TEMP0812897 TEMP0822898 TEMP0832899 TEMP0842900 TEMP0852901 TEMP0862902 TEMP0872903 TEMP0882904 TEMP0892905 TEMP0902906 TEMP0912907 TEMP0922908 TEMP0932909 TEMP0942910 TEMP0952911 TEMP0962912 TEMP0972913 TEMP0982914 TEMP0992915 TEMP1002916 TEMP1012917 TEMP1022918 TEMP1032919 TEMP1042920 TEMP1052921 TEMP1062922 TEMP1072923 TEMP1082924 TEMP1092925 TEMP1102926 TEMP1112927 TEMP1122928 TEMP1132929 TEMP1142930 TEMP1152931 TEMP1162932 TEMP1172933 TEMP1182934 TEMP1192935 TEMP1202936 TEMP1212937 TEMP1222938 TEMP1232939 TEMP1242940 TEMP1252941 TEMP1262942 TEMP1272943 TEMP1282944 TEMP1292945 TEMP1302946 TEMP1312947 TEMP1322948 TEMP1332949 TEMP1342950 TEMP1352951 TEMP1362952 TEMP1372953 TEMP1382954 TEMP1392955 TEMP1402956 TEMP1412957 TEMP1422958 TEMP1432959 TEMP1442960 TEMP145

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 223 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot

Time Value

2961 TEMP1462962 TEMP1472963 TEMP1482964 TEMP1492965 TEMP1502966 TEMP1512967 TEMP1522968 TEMP1532969 TEMP1542970 TEMP1552971 TEMP1562972 TEMP1572973 TEMP1582974 TEMP1592975 TEMP1602976 TEMP1612977 TEMP1622978 TEMP1632979 TEMP1642980 TEMP1652981 TEMP1662982 TEMP1672983 TEMP1682984 TEMP1692985 TEMP1702986 TEMP1712987 TEMP1722988 TEMP1732989 TEMP1742990 TEMP1752991 TEMP1762992 TEMP1772993 TEMP1782994 TEMP1792995 TEMP1802996 TEMP1812997 TEMP1822998 TEMP1832999 TEMP1843000 TEMP1853001 TEMP1863002 TEMP1873003 TEMP1883004 TEMP1893005 TEMP1903006 TEMP1913007 TEMP1923008 TEMP1933009 TEMP1943010 TEMP1953011 TEMP1963012 TEMP1973013 TEMP1983014 TEMP1993015 TEMP2003016 TEMP2013017 TEMP2023018 TEMP2033019 TEMP2043020 TEMP2053021 TEMP2063022 TEMP2073023 TEMP2083024 TEMP2093025 TEMP2103026 TEMP2113027 TEMP2123028 TEMP2133029 TEMP2143030 TEMP2153031 TEMP2163032 TEMP2173033 TEMP2183034 TEMP2193035 TEMP220

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 224 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip FlopCycle Flip Flop Timer

30 90 User Norm BackUp

ReleaseSignal

OffDelay

OnDelay

OneShot Time Value

3036 TEMP2213037 TEMP2223038 TEMP2233039 TEMP2243040 TEMP2253041 TEMP2263042 TEMP2273043 TEMP2283044 TEMP2293045 TEMP2303046 TEMP2313047 TEMP2323048 TEMP2333049 TEMP2343050 TEMP2353051 TEMP2363052 TEMP2373053 TEMP2383054 TEMP2393055 TEMP2403056 TEMP2413057 TEMP2423058 TEMP2433059 TEMP2443060 TEMP2453061 TEMP2463062 TEMP2473063 TEMP2483064 TEMP2493065 TEMP2503066 TEMP2513067 TEMP2523068 TEMP2533069 TEMP2543070 TEMP2553071 TEMP256

None№ Signal Turn --

⎯ 225 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

6. Disturbance record setting

Disturbance record default setting

Signal No. Signal Name 210 410SIG1 0 - 3071 Signal name1 0 NA --SIG2 0 - 3071 Signal name2 0 NA --SIG3 0 - 3071 Signal name3 0 NA --SIG4 0 - 3071 Signal name4 0 NA --SIG5 0 - 3071 Signal name5 0 NA --SIG6 0 - 3071 Signal name6 0 NA --SIG7 0 - 3071 Signal name7 0 NA --SIG8 0 - 3071 Signal name8 0 NA --SIG9 0 - 3071 Signal name9 60 UV1-1 xSIG10 0 - 3071 Signal name10 61 UV1-2 xSIG11 0 - 3071 Signal name11 62 UV1-3 xSIG12 0 - 3071 Signal name12 122 UV1 TRIP xSIG13 0 - 3071 Signal name13 93 ZOV1 xSIG14 0 - 3071 Signal name14 143 ZOV1 TRIP xSIG15 0 - 3071 Signal name15 0 NA --SIG16 0 - 3071 Signal name16 371 GEN.TRIP xSIG17 0 - 3071 Signal name17 0 NA --SIG18 0 - 3071 Signal name18 0 NA --SIG19 0 - 3071 Signal name19 0 NA --SIG20 0 - 3071 Signal name20 0 NA --SIG21 0 - 3071 Signal name21 0 NA --SIG22 0 - 3071 Signal name22 0 NA --SIG23 0 - 3071 Signal name23 0 NA --SIG24 0 - 3071 Signal name24 0 NA --SIG25 0 - 3071 Signal name25 0 NA --SIG26 0 - 3071 Signal name26 0 NA --SIG27 0 - 3071 Signal name27 0 NA --SIG28 0 - 3071 Signal name28 0 NA --SIG29 0 - 3071 Signal name29 0 NA --SIG30 0 - 3071 Signal name30 0 NA --SIG31 0 - 3071 Signal name31 0 NA --SIG32 0 - 3071 Signal name32 0 NA --

Signal ModelName Range Signal Name

User setting of Virtual LED1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IND1 [ ]

IND2 [ ]

⎯ 226 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 227 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix H

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

⎯ 228 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number

Model System frequency

Station Date

Circuit Engineer

Protection scheme Witness

Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

DC power supply

Wiring

Calendar and clock

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

⎯ 229 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test (1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1

OV2

OV3

UV1

UV2

UV3

ZOV1

ZOV2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

OV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

OV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

UV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

UV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

ZOV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

ZOV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

⎯ 230 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test (1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NOV1

NOV2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NOV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

NOV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

4.3 Frequency elements test

Element Frequency setting Measured frequency

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

⎯ 231 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix I

Return Repair Form

⎯ 232 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION with the GRD130 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRD130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRD130 Model: 210D )

Product No.:

Serial No.:

Date:

1. Reason for returning the relay

mal-function

does not operate

increased error

investigation

others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are very helpful information to investigate the incident.

Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

⎯ 233 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Fault Record Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .

(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

Fault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

⎯ 234 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4. Describe the details of the incident:

5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /

(Example: 10/Dec/2002)

6. Give any comments about the GRD130, including the documents:

⎯ 235 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Customer

Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

⎯ 236 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 237 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix J

Technical Data

⎯ 238 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

TECHNICAL DATA Ratings AC voltage Vn: 100V to 120 V Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz DC auxiliary supply: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)

220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc) 48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc) 24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)

Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12% DC supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V Binary input circuit DC voltage: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)

220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc) 48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc) 24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)

Overload Ratings AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous

Burden AC voltage inputs: ≤ 0.1VA (at rated voltage) DC power supply: ≤ 10W (quiescent)

≤ 15W (maximum) Binary input circuit: ≤ 0.5W per input at 110Vdc

Overvoltage Protection 1st, 2nd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps DO/PU ratio 10 – 98% in 1% steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Protection 1st, 2nd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Undervoltage Block 5.0 – 20.0Vin 0.1V steps

Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (ZOV) 1st, 2nd ZOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (NOV) 1st, 2nd NOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 6055-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

⎯ 239 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Under/Over Frequency Protection 1st - 4th under/overfrequency threshold (Fnom − 10.00Hz) – (Fnom + 10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps

Fnom: nominal frequency DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps

Voltage and Synchronizm Check Synchronism check angle (θS) 5 to 75° in 1° steps UV element (SYUV) 10 to 150V in 1V steps OV element (SYOV) 10 to 150V in 1V steps Voltage difference check (ΔV) 0 to 150V in 1V steps Busbar or line dead check (VB) 10 to 150V in 1V steps Busbar or line live check (VL) 10 to 150V in 1V steps Frequency difference check (Δf) 0.01 to 2.00Hz in 0.01 steps Synchronism check time (TSYN) 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps Voltage check time 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps

Accuracy Overvoltage Pick-ups: Undervoltage Pick-ups:

100% of setting ± 5% 100% of setting ± 5%

Inverse Time Delays: ± 5% or 30ms (1.5 to 30 times setting) Definite Time Delays: ± 1% or 10ms

Front Communication port - local PC (RS232) Connection: Point to point Cable type: Multi-core (straight) Cable length: 15m (max.) Connector: RS232C 9-way D-type female

Rear Communication port - remote PC RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103: Connection Cable type Cable length Connection

Isolation Transmission rate

Multidrop (max. 32 relays) Twisted pair cable with shield 1200m (max.) Screw terminals 1kVac for 1 min. 9.6, 19.2kbps

Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103: Cable type Connector Transmission rate

Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125μm fibre ST 9.6, 19.2kbps

Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100: 100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector 100BASE-FX: SC connector

Time synchronization port IRIG Time Code Input impedance Input voltage range Connection

IRIG-B122 4k-ohm 4Vp-p to 10Vp-p Screw type

⎯ 240 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Binary Inputs Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating

Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating Typical 15Vdc (min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating

Binary Outputs Number 8 Ratings: Make and carry: 4A continuously

Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≥5ms) Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc

Durability: Loaded contact: 10000 operations Unloaded contact: 100000 operations

Mechanical design Weight 4.5kg Case colour Munsell No. 10YR8/1

Installation Flush mounting

⎯ 241 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.

Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.

Humidity IEC60068-2-3 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.

Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51

Mechanical Environment Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1

Endurance - Class 1

Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1 Shock Withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1

Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1

Electrical Environment Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.

2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits. 1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak), 1.2/50μs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment High Frequency Disturbance / Damped Oscillatory Wave

IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, IEC61000-4-12 / EN61000-4-12

1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode. 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Electrostatic Discharge

IEC60255-22-2 Class 4, IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2

8kV contact discharge, 15kV air discharge.

Radiated RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and 1.4GHz to 4.0GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1860 and 2150MHz.

Fast Transient Disturbance

IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 / EN61000-4-4

4kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns 2kV, 5k/100kHz, 5/50ns applied to com ports (RS485, etc.)

Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5

1.2/50μs surge in common/differential modes: HV ports: 2kV/1kV PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV RS485 port: 1kV/ -

Conducted RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz. Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency Disturbance

IEC60255-22-7, IEC61000-4-16 / EN61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode. 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode. Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and Radiated Emissions

IEC60255-25 Class A, EN55022 Class A, IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4

Conducted emissions: 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean) 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean) Radiated emissions (at 10m): 30 to 230MHz: <40dB 230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

⎯ 242 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.

⎯ 243 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix K

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

⎯ 244 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:

Signal names Marked with : Measuring element output signal

Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch

Marked with " " : Scheme switch position

Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

A B C Output 1 1 1 1

Other cases 0

A B C Output 1 1 0 1

Other cases 0

A B C Output 1 0 0 1

Other cases 0

OR gates

A B C Output 0 0 0 0

Other cases 1

A B C Output 0 0 1 0

Other cases 1

A B C Output 0 1 1 0

Other cases 1

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B

C &

⎯ 245 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Signal inversion

A Output 0 1 1 0

Timer Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

One-shot timer

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Flip-flop S R Output 0 0 No change 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

Scheme switch A Switch Output 1 ON 1 Other cases 0

Switch Output

ON 1 OFF 0

Output A

0 t

XXX

t 0

XXX

0 t

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY

t 0

Output

Output ON

ON +

A

S Output F/F

R

1

XXX - YYY

A Output A

Output

⎯ 246 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 247 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix L

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

⎯ 248 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

IEC60870-5-103 Configurator IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily as follows:

Installation of IEC103 Configurator Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.

Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “¥IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and operate it according to the message.

When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start menu.

Starting IEC103 Configurator Click [Start]→[Programs]→[IEC103 Configurator]→[IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator software.

Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking [Help]→[Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.

Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station Polling cycle: 150ms or more Timeout time (time till re-sending the request frame to relay): 100ms or more

IEC103 master GR relay

Data request

Data request

Response frame

Response frame

Polling cycle: 150ms or more

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

1. Physical Layer 1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485

Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment

1.2 Optical interface

Glass fibre (option)

ST type connector (option)

1.3 Transmission speed

User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s

2. Application Layer COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU

One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

⎯ 249 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3. List of Information The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”. (For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)

- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number), COT

- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number), COT, Type of measurand quantities

- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)

- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of measurand quantities

- Common setting

• Transmission cycle of Measurand frame • FUN of System function • Test mode, etc.

CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply of the relay and turn on again.

3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface 3.1.1 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.

3.1.2 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.

3.1.3 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can be customized.

3.1.4 Commands

The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported commands with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.4.

3.1.5 Test mode

In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.5.

3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction

If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and measurands are no longer transmitted.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.6.

⎯ 250 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

3.2 List of Information The followings are the default settings.

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI ID Signal No. OFF ON

Standard Information numbers in monitor direction

System Function0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --

0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --

2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 215 -- -- --

3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 215 -- -- --

4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 215 -- -- --

5 Pow er On Relay pow er on. Not supported

Status Indications

16 Auto-recloser active If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is setactive, if impossible, inactive.

Not supported

17 Teleprotection active If protection using telecommunication is available, thisitem is set to active. If not, set to inactive.

Not supported

18 Protection active If the protection is available, this item is set to active. Ifnot, set to inactive.

GI 1 1, 7, 12 215 1413 1 2

19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1409 -- 2

20 Monitor direction blocked Block the 103 transmission from a relay to controlsystem. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.

GI 1 11 215 1241 1 2

21 Test mode Transmission of testmode situation froma relay tocontrol system. IECTST "ON" setting.

GI 1 11 215 1242 1 2

22 Local parameter Setting When a setting change has done at the local, theevent is sent to control system.

Not supported

23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1243 1 2

24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1244 1 2

25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1245 1 2

26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 215 1246 1 2

27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set

28 Auxiliary input2 Binary input 2 No set

29 Auxiliary input3 Binary input 3 No set

30 Auxiliary input4 Binary input 4 No set

Supervision Indications32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision Not supported

33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 7 215 1268 1 2

35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 7 215 1269 1 2

36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 7 215 1270 1 2

37 I>>backup operation Not supported

38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported

39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported

46 Group w arning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7 215 1258 1 2

47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7 215 1252 1 2

Earth Fault Indications48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault Not supported

49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault Not supported

50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault Not supported

51 Earth Fault Fw d Earth fault forw ard Not supported

52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported

⎯ 251 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI ID Signal NO. OFF ON

Fault Indications64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 805 1 2

65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 806 1 2

66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 807 1 2

67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 808 1 2

68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1, 7 215 371 -- 2

69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 372 -- 2

70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 373 -- 2

71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 215 374 -- 2

72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported

73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location Not supported

74 Fault forw ard/line Forw ard fault Not supported

75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported

76 Teleprotection Signal transmitted Carrier signal sending Not supported

77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported

78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

79 Zone2 Zone 2 trip Not supported

80 Zone3 Zone 3 trip Not supported

81 Zone4 Zone 4 trip Not supported

82 Zone5 Zone 5 trip Not supported

83 Zone6 Zone 6 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7 215 1279 1 2

85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported

86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported

87 Trip measuring system L2 Not supported

88 Trip measuring system L3 Not supported

89 Trip measuring system E Not supported

90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip Not supported

91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip Not supported

92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip Not supported

93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip Not supported

Autoreclose indications128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported

129CB 'ON' by long-timeAutoreclose Not supported

130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported

⎯ 252 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

IEC103 configurator Default settingINF Description Contents

GI TypeID

COT FUN Max. No.

Measurands144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0

145 Measurand I,V Vab <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 2

146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Vab <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 4

147 Measurand IN,VEN Ve <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 215 2

148 Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,P,Q,f

Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 215 9

Generic Function240 Read Headings Not supported

241 Read attributes of all entries ofa group

Not supported

243 Read directory of entry Not supported

244 Real attribute of entry Not supported

245 End of GGI Not supported

249 Write entry w ith confirm Not supported

250 Write entry w ith execute Not supported

251 Write entry aborted Not supported Note (∗2): depends on relay model as follows:

Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4Model and [APPL] (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)setting IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VENModel 210 0 0 Vph-ph 0 Vph-ph － － 0 VeModel 410 0 0 Vab 0 Vab － － 0 Ve

Type ID=9Model and [APPL] (INF=148)setting IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q fModel 210 0 0 0 Vph-n 0 0 0 0 fModel 410 0 0 0 Van Vbn Vcn 0 0 f

Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.

Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit CoeffLower Upper

145 Vab 1 24 long 0 4096 1.8618

146 Vab 1 24 long 0 4096 1.8618

147 Ve 1 144 long 0 4096 3.2252

148 Va 1 0 long 0 4096 3.2252

Vb 1 8 long 0 4096 3.2252

Vc 1 16 long 0 4096 3.2252

f 1 184 long 0 4096 0.68267

⎯ 253 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

IEC103 Configurator Default settingControl

direction Type ID COT FUN

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction

System functions

0 Initiation of general interrogation -- 7 9 255

0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255

General commands16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported

17 Teleprotection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 215

18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 215

19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 215

23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 215

24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 215

25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 ON 20 20 215

26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 ON 20 20 215

Generic functions

240 Read headings of all definedgroups

Not supported

241 Read values or attributes of allentries of one group

Not supported

243 Read directory of a single entry Not supported

244 Read values or attributes of asingle entry

Not supported

245 General Interrogation of genericdata

Not supported

248 Write entry Not supported

249 Write entry w ith confirmation Not supported

250 Write entry w ith execution Not supported

INF Description Contents

(∗1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, "IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

INF DCOSig off Sig on Rev Valid time

16 2684 2684 0

17 2685 2685 0

18 2686 2686 0

19 0 2688 200

23 0 2640 1000

24 0 2641 1000

25 0 2642 1000

26 0 2643 1000 ✓: signal reverse

✓ ✓ ✓

⎯ 254 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Description Contents GRD140 supported Comment

Basic application functionsTest mode Yes

Blocking of monitor direction Yes

Disturbance data No

Generic services No

Private data Yes

Miscellaneous

Measurand Max. MVAL = rated valuetimes

Current L1 Ia Configurable

Current L2 Ib Configurable

Current L3 Ic Configurable

Voltage L1-E Va Configurable

Voltage L2-E Vb Configurable

Voltage L3-E Vc Configurable

Active pow er P P Configurable

Reactive pow er Q Q Configurable

Frequency f f Configurable

Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No set

Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Setting file’s remark: IGRD130DA001 - Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000 - Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000 - Measurand period [s]: 2 - Function type of System functions: 215 - Signal No. of Test mode: 1242 - Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279

⎯ 255 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

[Legend]

GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)

Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)

1 : time-tagged message 2 : time-tagged message with relative time 3 : measurands I 4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 : identification 6 : time synchronization 8 : general interrogation termination 9 : measurands II 10: generic data 11: generic identification 20: general command 23: list of recorded disturbances 26: ready for transmission for disturbance data 27: ready for transmission of a channel 28: ready for transmission of tags 29: transmission of tags 30: transmission of disturbance values 31: end of transmission

COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3) 1: spontaneous 2: cyclic 3: reset frame count bit (FCB) 4: reset communication unit (CU) 5: start / restart 6: power on 7: test mode 8: time synchronization 9: general interrogation 10: termination of general interrogation 11: local operation 12: remote operation 20: positive acknowledgement of command 21: negative acknowledgement of command 31: transmission of disturbance data 40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command 41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command 42: valid data response to generic read command 43: invalid data response to generic read command 44: generic write confirmation

FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)

DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)

DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)

⎯ 256 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:

(1) Naming for IEC103setting data

The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:

First draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_01.csv

Second draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_02.csv

Third draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_03.csv

Revision number

The name “∗∗∗∗∗∗” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.

(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data

The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk) or CD-R, not to remain in the folder.

⎯ 257 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Troubleshooting

No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation Object Procedure

1 Communication trouble (IEC103 communication is not available.)

Address setting is incorrect. BCU RY

Match address setting between BCU and relay. Avoid duplication of address with other relay.

Transmission baud rate setting is incorrect.

BCU RY

Match transmission baud rate setting between BCU and relay.

Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of data that BCU transmits to relay is incorrect.

BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay setting is fixed as following settings. - Start bit: 1bit - Stop bit: 1bit - Parity setting: even

RS485 or optical cable interconnection is incorrect.

Cable - Check the connection port. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM

- Check the send and received interconnection of optical cable.

The setting of converter is incorrect. (RS485/optic conversion is executed with the transmission channel, etc.)

Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL (6F2S0794).

The relationship between logical “0/1” of the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In the event of using optical cable)

BCU Check the following; Logical0 : Sig.on Logical1:Sig.off

Terminal resistor is not offered. (Especially when RS485 cable is long.)

cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends of RS 485 cable.

Relay cannot receive the requirement frame from BCU. (The timing coordination of sending and receiving switch control is irregular in half-duplex communication.)

BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms between receiving the reply frame from the relay and transmitting the next requirement frame on BCU.

The requirement frame from BCU and the reply frame from relay contend. (The sending and receiving timing coordination is irregular in half-duplex communication.)

BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the relay.

ting: more than 100ms (acceptable value of response time 50ms plus margin)

2 HMI does not display IEC103 event on the SAS side.

The relevant event sending condition is not valid.

RY Change the event sending condition (signal number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a setting error. When the setting is correct, check the signal condition by programmable LED, etc.

The relevant event Information Number (INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) may be different between the relay and SAS.

RY SAS

Match the relevant event Information Number (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay and SAS.

The relay is not initialised after writing IEC103 configurator setting.

RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from the LCD screen. When differing from the sum value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.

It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal. 3 Time can be

synchronised with IEC103 communication.

BCU does not transmit the frame of time synchronisation.

BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.

The settling of time synchronisation source is set to other than IEC.

RY Change the settling of time synchronisation source to IEC.

(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay

⎯ 258 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

⎯ 259 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix M

IEC61850: MICS & PICS

⎯ 260 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

The GRD130 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables. Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4 Logical Nodes GRD130L: System Logical Nodes LPHD Yes Common Logical Node Yes LLN0 Yes P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions PDIF --- PDIR --- PDIS --- PDOP --- PDUP --- PFRC Yes PHAR --- PHIZ --- PIOC --- PMRI --- PMSS --- POPE --- PPAM --- PSCH --- PSDE --- PTEF --- PTOC --- PTOF Yes PTOV Yes PTRC Yes PTTR --- PTUC --- PTUV Yes PUPF --- PTUF Yes PVOC --- PVPH --- PZSU --- R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions RDRE --- RADR --- RBDR --- RDRS --- RBRF --- RDIR --- RFLO --- RPSB --- RREC --- RSYN Yes C: Logical Nodes for Control CALH --- CCGR --- CILO --- CPOW --- CSWI --- G: Logical Nodes for Generic references GAPC --- GGIO Yes

Nodes GRD130 GGIO_GOOSE Yes GSAL --- I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving IARC --- IHMI --- ITCI --- ITMI --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control ANCR --- ARCO --- ATCC --- AVCO --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement MDIF --- MHAI --- MHAN --- MMTR --- MMXN --- MMXU Yes MSQI Yes MSTA --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring SARC --- SIMG --- SIML --- SPDC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear XCBR Yes XSWI --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers TCTR --- TVTR --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers YEFN --- YLTC --- YPSH --- YPTR --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment ZAXN --- ZBAT --- ZCAB --- ZCAP --- ZCON --- ZGEN --- ZGIL --- ZLIN --- ZMOT ---

ZREA --- ZRRC --- ZSAR --- ZTCF --- ZTCR ---

⎯ 261 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3 Common data classes GRD130Status information SPS Yes DPS --- INS Yes ACT Yes ACT_ABC Yes ACD Yes ACD_ABC Yes SEC --- BCR --- Measured information MV Yes CMV Yes SAV --- WYE Yes WYE_ABCN Yes DEL Yes SEQ Yes HMV --- HWYE ---

HDEL --- Controllable status information SPC Yes DPC Yes INC Yes BSC --- ISC --- Controllable analogue information APC --- Status settings SPG --- ING Yes Analogue settings ASG Yes CURVE --- Description information DPL Yes LPL Yes CSD ---

⎯ 262 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

LPHD class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N Common Logical Node class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD) Mod INC Mode M Y Beh INS Behaviour M Y Health INS Health M Y NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y Optional Logical Node Information Loc SPS Local operation O N EEHealth INS External equipment health O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N OpCnt INS Operation counter O N OpTmh INS Operation time O N Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Services (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) LLN0 class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y OpTmh INS Operation time O N Controls Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y

⎯ 263 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PFRC class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTOF class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTOV class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD_ABC Start M Y Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N Settings TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N StrVal ASG Start Value O Y TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTRC class

⎯ 264 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Tr ACT_ABC Trip C Y Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N Settings TrMod ING Trip Mode O N TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used. PTUV class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD_ABC Start M Y Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N Settings TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N StrVal ASG Start Value O Y TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTUF class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N GGIO class

⎯ 265 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Measured values AnIn MV Analogue input O N Controls SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind2 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind3 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind4 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind5 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind6 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind7 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind8 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind9 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

: : :

Ind64 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

⎯ 266 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GGIO_GOOSE class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Measured values AnIn MV Analogue input O N Controls SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind2 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind3 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind4 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind5 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind6 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind7 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind8 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind9 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind11 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind12 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind13 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind14 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind15 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind16 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

⎯ 267 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MMXU class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N Measured values TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N Hz MV Frequency O Y PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y PhV WYE_ABCN Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y A WYE_ABCN Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O N W WYE Phase active power (P) O N VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N PF WYE Phase power factor O N Z WYE Phase Impedance O N MSQI class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRD130LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Measured values SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C N SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.

⎯ 268 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

SPS class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 INS class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1) q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

Substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 (*1): “ENUM” type is also used.

⎯ 269 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

ACT class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

configuration, description and extension operTm TimeStamp CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 ACT_ABC class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

configuration, description and extension operTm TimeStamp CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13

⎯ 270 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

ACD class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 ACD_ABC class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y

configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13

⎯ 271 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MV class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

measured values instMag AnalogueValue MX O N mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N q Quality MX qchg M Y t TimeStamp MX M Y

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

⎯ 272 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

CMV class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

measured values instCVal Vector MX O N cVal Vector MX dchg M Y range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N q Quality MX qchg M Y t TimeStamp MX M Y

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

⎯ 273 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

WYE class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data phsA CMV GC_1 Y phsB CMV GC_1 Y phsC CMV GC_1 Y neut CMV GC_1 N net CMV GC_1 N res CMV GC_1 N DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca |

Vother | AotherO N

d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

WYE_ABCN class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data phsA CMV GC_1 Y phsB CMV GC_1 Y phsC CMV GC_1 Y neut CMV GC_1 Y net CMV GC_1 N res CMV GC_1 N DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca |

Vother | AotherO N

d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

⎯ 274 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

DEL class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data phsAB CMV GC_1 Y phsBC CMV GC_1 Y phsCA CMV GC_1 Y DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab |

Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother O N

d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

SEQ class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data c1 CMV M Y c2 CMV M Y c3 CMV M Y DataAttribute

measured attributes seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y

configuration, description and extension phsRef ENUMERATED CF A | B | C | … O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21

⎯ 275 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

SPC class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

control and status ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M

and AC_CO_SBOW_E_M

and AC_CO_TA_E_M

N

stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31

⎯ 276 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

DPC class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

control and status ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on |

bad-state M Y

q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on |

bad-state PICS_SUBST N

subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31

⎯ 277 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

INC class Attribute

Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

control and status ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M

and AC_CO_SBOW_E_M

and AC_CO_TA_E_M

N

stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y Q Quality ST qchg M Y T TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N

substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N

configuration, description and extension CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N minVal INT32 CF O N maxVal INT32 CF O N stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31

⎯ 278 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

ING class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

setting setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3) setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N

configuration, description and extension minVal INT32 CF O N maxVal INT32 CF O N stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 39 (*3): “ENUM” type is also used. ASG class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

setting setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N

configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y minVal AnalogueValue CF O N maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 42

⎯ 279 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

DPL class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 45 LPL class

Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRD130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only;

for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"AC_LN0_EX N

lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 45

⎯ 280 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PICS: Client/

subscriberServer/

publisherGRD130 Remarks

Client-server roles B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY-

APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION) - c1 Y

B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)

c1 - -

SCSMs supported B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N B24 SCSM: other - Generic substation event model (GSE) B31 Publisher side - O Y B32 Subscriber side O - Y Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) B41 Publisher side - O N B42 Subscriber side O - N If Server side (B11) supported M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y M3 Data c4 c4 Y M4 Data set c5 c5 Y M5 Substitution O O N M6 Setting group control O O Y Reporting M7 Buffered report control O O Y M7-1 sequence-number Y M7-2 report-time-stamp Y M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y M7-4 data-set-name Y M7-5 data-reference Y M7-6 buffer-overflow Y M7-7 entryID Y M7-8 BufTm Y M7-9 IntgPd Y M7-10 GI Y Unbuffered report control O O Y M8-1 sequence-number Y M8-2 report-time-stamp Y M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y M8-4 data-set-name Y M8-5 data-reference Y M8-6 BufTm Y M8-7 IntgPd Y M8-8 GI Y Logging O O N M9 Log control O O N M9-1 IntgPd N M10 Log O O N M11 Control M M Y If GSE (B31/B32) is supported GOOSE O O Y M12-1 entryID

⎯ 281 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

M12-2 DataRefInc M13 GSSE O O N If SVC (B41/B42) is supported M14 Multicast SVC O O N M15 Unicast SVC O O N M16 Time M M Y M17 File Transfer O O Y Server S1 ServerDirectory M Y Application association S2 Associate M M Y S3 Abort M M Y S4 Release M M Y Logical device S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y Logical node S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M M Y S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y Data S8 GetDataValues M M Y S9 SetDataValues O O N S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y Data set S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y S13 SetDataSetValues O O N S14 CreateDataSet O O N S15 DeleteDataSet O O N S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y Substitution S17 SetDataValues M M N Setting group control S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y S19 SelectEditSG O O N S20 SetSGValues O O N S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N S22 GetSGValues O O N S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y Reporting Buffered report control block (BRCB) S24 Report c6 c6 Y S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y S24-3 data-update (dupd) N S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y Unbuffered report control block (BRCB) S27 Report c6 c6 Y S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y S27-3 data-update (dupd) N S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y Logging Log control block S30 GetLCBValues M M N

⎯ 282 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

S31 SetLCBValues O M N Log S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N Generic substation event model (GSE) GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y S36 GetGoReference O c9 N S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N S41 GetGsReference O c9 N S42 GetGSSEElementNumber O c9 N S43 GetGsCBValues O O N S44 SetGsCBValues O O N Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N Control S51 Select M O N S52 SelectWithValue M O Y S53 Cancel O O Y S54 Operate M M Y S55 CommandTermination M O Y S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N File Transfer S57 GetFile O M Y S58 SetFile O O N S59 DeleteFile O O N S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y Time T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1 T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms M – Mandatory O – Optional c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared. c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared. c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared. c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been

declared. c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared. c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB) c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter). c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage) c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available. c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).

⎯ 283 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile shortcut

Profile Description Client Server GRD130 Remarks F/S F/S

A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y A2 GOOSE/GSE

management A-Profile c2 c2 Y

A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.c2 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC

61850-8-1.

PICS for T-Profile support A-Profile shortcut

Profile Description Client Server GRD130 Remarks F/S F/S

T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.

⎯ 284 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

InitiateRequest Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateRequest localDetailCalling m m m m Y proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y proposedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y initRequestDetail m m m m Y InitiateRequestDetail proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

InitiateRequest Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateResponse localDetailCalled m m m m Y negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled m m 1 or greater m m 1 or greater Y initResponseDetail m m m m Y InitiateResponseDetail negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

⎯ 285 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MMS service supported conformance table

MMS service supported CBB Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

status o o o m Y getNameList o o o c1 Y identify o o m m Y rename o o o o N read o o o c2 Y write o o o c3 Y getVariableAccessAttributes o o o c4 Y defineNamedVariable o o o o N defineScatteredAccess o i o i N getScatteredAccessAttributes o i o i N deleteVariableAccess o o o o N defineNamedVariableList o o o o N getNamedVariableListAttributes o o o c5 Y deleteNamedVariableList o o o c6 N defineNamedType o i o i N getNamedTypeAttributes o i o i N deleteNamedType o i o i N input o i o i N output o i o i N takeControl o i o i N relinquishControl o i o i N defineSemaphore o i o i N deleteSemaphore o i o i N reportPoolSemaphoreStatus o i o i N reportSemaphoreStatus o i o i N initiateDownloadSequence o i o i N downloadSegment o i o i N terminateDownloadSequence o i o i N initiateUploadSequence o i o i N uploadSegment o i o i N terminateUploadSequence o i o i N requestDomainDownload o i o i N requestDomainUpload o i o i N loadDomainContent o i o i N storeDomainContent o i o i N deleteDomain o i o i N getDomainAttributes o o o c14 Y createProgramInvocation o i o i N

⎯ 286 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MMS service supported CBB Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N start o i o i N stop o i o i N resume o i o i N reset o i o i N kill o i o i N getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N obtainFile o c9 o c9 N defineEventCondition o i o i N deleteEventCondition o i o i N getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N triggerEvent o i o i N defineEventAction o i o i N deleteEventAction o i o i N alterEventEnrollment o i o i N reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N getAlarmSummary o i o i N getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N readJournal o c13 o c13 N writeJournal o o o o N initializeJournal o o o c12 N reportJournalStatus o i o i N createJournal o i o i N deleteJournal o i o i N fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y fileRead o c8 o c8 Y fileClose o c8 o c8 Y fileRename o i o i N fileDelete o c9 o c9 N fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y unsolicitedStatus o i o i N informationReport o c7 o c7 Y eventNotification o i o i N attachToEventCondition o i o i N attachToSemaphore o i o i N conclude m m m m N cancel o o o m N getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N exchangeData o c10 o c10 N

⎯ 287 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

MMS service supported CBB Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement. c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS write service is declared. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied. c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement. c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement. c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared. c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared. c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared. c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared. c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1. c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared. c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared. c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared. c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.

MMS Parameter CBB

MMS parameter CBB Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

STR1 o o o c1 Y STR2 o o o o N

NEST

1 1 or greater

1 c2 Y(10)

VNAM o o o c1 Y VADR o o o o N VALT o o o c1 Y bit x x x x N TPY o o o o N VLIS o c1 o c3 Y bit x x x x N bit x x x x N CEI o i o i N ACO o c4 o c4 N SEM o c4 o c4 N CSR o c4 o c4 N CSNC o c4 o c4 N CSPLC o c4 o c4 N CSPI o c4 o c4 N c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared. c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared. c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.

⎯ 288 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

GetNameList conformance statement

GetNameList Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request ObjectClass m m m m Y ObjectScope m m m m Y DomainName o o m m Y ContinueAfter o m m m Y

Response+ List Of Identifier m m m m Y MoreFollows m m m m Y

Response- Error Type m m m m Y

NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an MMS Reject shall be issued.

AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement Not applicable.

VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

VariableAccessSpecification Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

listOfVariable o o o c1 Y variableSpecification o o o c1 Y alternateAccess o o o c1 Y

variableListName o o o c2 Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared. c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.

VariableSpecification conformance statement

VariableSpecification Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

name o o o m Y address o o o i N variableDescription o o o i N scatteredAccessDescription o x o x N invalidated o x o x N

Read conformance statement

Read Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request specificationWithResult o o o m Y variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y

Response variableAccessSpecification o o o m Y listOfAccessResult m m m m Y

⎯ 289 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Write conformance statement

Write Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y listOfData m m m m Y

Response failure m m m m Y success m m m m Y

InformationReport conformance statement

InformationReport Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request variableAccessSpecification m m m m Y listOfAccessResult m m m m Y

GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

GetVariableAccessAttributes Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request name o o m m Y address o o m x N

Response mmsDeletable m m m m Y address o x o x N typeSpecification m m m m Y

DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement Not applicable.

GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

GetNamedVariableListAttributes Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request ObjectName m m m m Y

Response mmsDeletable m m m m Y listOfVariable m m m m Y variableSpecification m m m m Y alternateAccess o m o i N

DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement Not applicable.

⎯ 290 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.

JournalEntry conformance statement Not applicable.

InitializeJournal conformance statement Not applicable.

FileDirectory conformance statement

FileDirectory Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request filespecification o o m m Y continueAfter o o m m Y

Response+ listOfDirectoryEntry m m m m Y MoreFollows m m m m Y

FileOpen conformance statement

FileOpen Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request filename m m m m Y initialPosition o o m m Y

Response+ frsmID m m m m Y fileAttributes m m m m Y

FileRead conformance statement

FileRead Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request frsmID m m m m Y

Response+ fileData m m m m Y MoreFollows m m m m Y

⎯ 291 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

FileClose conformance statement

FileClose Client-CR Server-CR GRD130 Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request frsmID m m m m Y

Response+ m m m m Y

GOOSE conformance statement Subscriber Publisher Value/comment GRD130 GOOSE Services c1 c1 Y SendGOOSEMessage m m Y GetGoReference o c3 N GetGOOSEElementNumber o c4 N GetGoCBValues o o Y SetGoCBValues o o Y GSENotSupported c2 c5 N GOOSE Control Block (GoCB) o o Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement. c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared. c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber. c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.

GSSE conformance statement Not applicable.

⎯ 292 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Appendix N

Ordering

⎯ 293 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Ordering

Type: Voltage Relay GRD130 Model: -Model 210: Two pole 210 -Model 410: Four pole 410 Ratings:

50Hz, 110/125Vdc 60Hz, 110/125Vdc 50Hz, 220/250Vdc 60Hz, 220/250Vdc 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc 50Hz, 24/30Vdc 60Hz, 24/30Vdc

1 2 5 6 A B E F

Communications: For IEC60870-5-103

RS485 RS485

Fibre optic Fibre optic

For IEC61850 / RSM100 100BASE-TX 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX 100BASE-FX

A B D E

Miscellaneous: None 0

D GRD130 0

⎯ 294 ⎯

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 4

Version-up Records

Version No.

Date Revised Section Contents

0.0 Sep. 2, 2010 -- First issue 1.0 Sep. 6, 2010 2.1.1

2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 6.5.1.1, 6.5.1.2 Appendices

Modified Figures 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5. (Signal No.) Modified Figures 2.1.9, 2.1.10 and 2.1.11. (Signal No.) Modified Figure 2.1.16 and 2.1.17. (Signal No.) Modified Figure 2.1.19 and 2.1.20. (Signal No.) Modified Signal No. Modified Appendix G.

1.1 Oct.27, 2011 1. 2.2 2.4 3.2 3.3.6

Modified descriptions